Viper SRT
OWNER’S MANUAL
2015
2015 Viper SRT
15ZD-126-AD Fourth Edition Printed in U.S.A.
FCA US LLC
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2016 FCA US LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . ..............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ..................................9
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ..................................85
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ......................................137
5
STARTINGANDOPERATING ....................................................215
6
WHATTODOINEMERGENCIES..................................................285
7
MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE...................................................305
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ....................................................359
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ............................................367
10
INDEX .....................................................................377
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC
vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workman-
ship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials
that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc-
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
nicians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfac-
tion.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
4 INTRODUCTION
1
INTRODUCTION 5
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against op-
erating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cau-
tions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel and is visible from
outside the vehicle through the windshield. This number
also appears on the top surface of the right-hand side
tunnel frame rail near the center of the vehicle, the
outboard facing surface of the right-hand side B-Pillar
frame rail, as well as the Automobile Information Disclo-
sure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the
vehicle registration, and the title.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
Vehicle Identification Number
6 INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
1
INTRODUCTION 7
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS .............11
▫ Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) ..............11
▫ KeyFob.............................12
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message ..........13
䡵 SENTRY KEY® .........................14
▫ Replacement Keys .....................15
▫ Customer Key Programming ..............16
▫ General Information ....................16
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM .......17
▫ Rearming Of The System .................17
▫ To Arm The System .....................17
▫ To Disarm The System ...................18
䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY ...................19
䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) ...........20
▫ To Unlock The Doors....................20
▫ To Lock The Doors .....................21
▫ To Unlatch The Liftgate ..................21
▫ Using The Panic Alarm ..................21
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters .......22
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement ...........22
2
▫ General Information ....................24
䡵 DOOR LOCKS .........................24
▫ Power Door Locks .....................25
䡵 WINDOWS ...........................27
▫ Power Windows .......................27
▫ Auto-Down Feature ....................29
▫ AUTO-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch
Protection ...........................29
▫ Reset Auto-Up ........................30
䡵 LIFTGATE ............................30
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ..........32
▫ Seat Belt Systems ......................34
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ........44
▫ Child Restraints .......................69
▫ Transporting Pets ......................80
䡵 BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ...........80
䡵 SAFETY TIPS ..........................81
▫ Transporting Passengers..................81
▫ Exhaust Gas ..........................81
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle .............................82
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ....................83
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN).
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Feature
This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™
feature, (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go⬙ in ⬙Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further information).
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition with
the push of a button, as long as the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter is in the passenger compartment.
The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) has four operating
positions; three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start
RUN will illuminate.
NOTE: In case the ignition does not change with the
push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may
have a low or dead battery.
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
Key Fob
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in
the rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
The emergency key is also for locking the glove box. You
can keep the emergency key with you when valet park-
ing.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb
and then pull the key out with your other hand.
NOTE: In the event that the FOB does not start the
vehicle (⬙FOB not Found⬙ message) use the FOB nose
(furthest point from key ring) and push the start button.
FOB replaces the finger.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
Opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in ACC or
ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind
you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the chime,
the ignition or accessory on message will display in the
cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect® system, the power window
switches, radio and power outlets will remain active for
up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer
to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
(Continued)
Emergency Key Removal
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
WARNING! (Continued)
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the Key Fob from vehicle, place the ignition
in the OFF and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
SENTRY KEY®
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system prevents unauthor-
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses a Key Fob with a factory-mated Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Ignition Node
(KIN) and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
operation. Therefore, only Key Fobs that are pro-
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to crank
with an invalid Key Fob.
After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the system. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start
the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the
engine being shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the system.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
• Do not make modifications or alterations to the
immobilizer system. Modifications or alterations to
the immobilization system may result in a loss of
security protection.
• The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not com-
patible with some aftermarket remote starting sys-
tems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and loss of security protection.
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
CAUTION!
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat-
tended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
position.
NOTE: Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of program-
ming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank
Key Fob is one that has never been programmed.
When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer System ser-
viced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized
dealer.
Customer Key Programming
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
General Information
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the doors, liftgate,
and hood for unauthorized entry and the ignition for
unauthorized operation. If something triggers the alarm,
the Vehicle Security Alarm will prevent the vehicle from
starting. It will also sound the horn and flash the park
lights, and taillights.
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the
horn after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals
(flashing lights) after 15 minutes, and then rearm itself.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicle ignition system is in the ⬙OFF⬙
position.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
• Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
• Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
Entering The Liftgate With The System Armed
NOTE: Using the key to open the liftgate while the
Vehicle Security Alarm is armed will trigger the alarm.
Push the LIFTGATE release button on the RKE transmit-
ter twice to allow access without triggering the alarm or
having to disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. Then,
within 30 seconds, open the liftgate by using the key
cylinder or the LIFTGATE release switch located in the
exterior liftgate handle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
To Disarm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
• Push the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
position:
• Push the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Start/Stop button
(requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle).
NOTE:
• The liftgate key cylinder cannot arm or disarm the
Vehicle Security Alarm.
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times, and the
exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the
Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering.
Electronic Immobilization System
The Electronic Immobilization system prevents unau-
thorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The interior lights will turn on whenever a door is
opened or the liftgate is opened and the dimmer switch is
not in the defeat position.
The interior lights will turn on, remain on for approxi-
mately 30 seconds, and then fade to off if any of the
following occur:
• A door is opened using the outside door handle and
then closed.
• A door is unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter.
The interior lights will turn on, remain on for about four
seconds, and then fade to off if a door is opened using the
inside door handle.
NOTE: None of the courtesy lights will operate if the
dimmer control is in the “defeat” position (extreme
downward position), unless the overhead map/reading
lights are turned on manually.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors
and liftgate, or activate the Panic Alarm from distances
up to approximately 66ft (20 m) using a hand-held Key
Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not
need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
To Unlock The Doors
Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice to
unlock both doors and the liftgate. The park lights and
turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the signal,
and the illuminated entry system will turn on. Refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
NOTE: The Door Unlock Indicator
will illuminate in
the instrument cluster when one or both doors are
unlocked.
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/Both Doors First
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Flash Lights With Lock
This feature lets you program the lights to flash when the
doors are locked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “ Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Unlock On 1st Press
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
To Lock The Doors
Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter to lock the doors. The horn will chirp once, and the
park lights and turn signal lights will flash to acknowl-
edge the signal.
Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
To Unlatch The Liftgate
Push the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter two
times within five seconds to unlatch the liftgate.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
headlights will turn on, the park lights will flash, the
horn will pulse on and off, and the interior lights will
turn on.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h) or greater.
NOTE: The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the
ignition switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while
the Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights
and horn will remain on.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways
with your thumb and then pull the key out with your
other hand.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage
the seal during removal.
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign
on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the
Emergency Key Removal Separating The RKE Transmitter Case
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
the battery is a minimum of three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB
radios.
DOOR LOCKS
WARNING!
• Do not touch the exhaust pipe sill covers when
entering or exiting your vehicle. They can be hot
enough to burn you. Observe the warning labels on
each door closure panel.
(Continued)
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• For personal security in the event of an collision,
lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when
you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always cycle the ignition
to the OFF mode lock, and lock your vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause
severe personal injuries and death.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
injured seriously or fatally. Don’t leave the ignition
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is on each door trim panel. Use
this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
If you push the power door lock switch while the ignition
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any front door
is open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents
you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle.
Cycling the ignition to the OFF position or closing the
door will allow the locks to operate. If a door is open, and
Power Door Lock Switch
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, a chime
will sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob.
NOTE: The Door Unlock Indicator
will illuminate in
the instrument cluster when one or both doors are
unlocked.
Automatic Door Locks
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see your authorized dealer.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en-
abled.
2. The driver door is opened.
3. The doors were not previously unlocked.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Set-
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The window controls on the driver’s door control both of
the door windows.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
There are single window controls on the passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door window.
The window controls will operate only when the ignition
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
The power window switches will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The
time is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-
Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can become en-
trapped by the windows while operating the power
window switches. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
Power Window Switches
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Auto-Down Feature
Both power window switches have an AUTO-down
feature. Push the window switch to the second detent,
release, and the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, push the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
AUTO-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and
the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
auto-up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent, and release it when you want the window
to stop.
NOTE:
• If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
switch again to close the window.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
first detent and hold to close the window manually.
• If the window detects an obstacle 10 times in a row, the
auto–up feature unlearns.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
may need to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
1. Make sure the door is fully closed.
2. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
3. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
LIFTGATE
The liftgate can be unlocked or locked by the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, the manual lock cylin-
der located on the rear panel, or by activating either of
the power door lock switches located on the door trim
panels.
Rear Panel Manual Lock Cylinder
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To unlock the liftgate with the RKE transmitter, push the
LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter two times.
Once unlocked, the liftgate can be opened or closed. To
open the liftgate, push the LIFTGATE RELEASE switch
located under the right side of the tail panel, which is
located below the liftgate, then pull the liftgate open with
one fluid motion.
NOTE: The liftgate release switch will be ignored under
the following conditions:
• When vehicle speed is not 0 mph (0 km/h).
Pull Up On The Liftgate
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
• When all doors are locked (except for RKE transmitter
liftgate access). Refer to “Entering the Liftgate with the
System Armed” under “Vehicle Security Alarm Sys-
tem” for additional information.
The liftgate ajar icon will illuminate in the Driver Infor-
mation Display (DID) when the liftgate is open.
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with tempera-
ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints
Important Safety Precautions:
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passenger as safe as
possible.
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”).
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle
seat belt properly (Refer to ⬙Child Restraints⬙) should
be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older chil-
dren who do not use child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled
up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Air Bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door and you could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⬙If You Need Assistance.⬙
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
happen far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front passenger (if equipped with out-
board front passenger BeltAlert) to buckle their seat
belts. The feature is active whenever the ignition is in
the START or ON/RUN position. If the driver or
outboard front seat passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both
outboard front seat belts are buckled.
The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the vehicle
speed is over 5 MPH (8 km/h) by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
duration or until the respective seat belts are buckled.
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
are buckled. The driver should instruct all other occu-
pants to buckle their seat belts. If an outboard front seat
belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5
MPH (8 km/h), BeltAlert will provide both audio and
visual notification.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy
object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho-
rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deacti-
vating BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the
driver’s or outboard front passenger’s (if equipped with
BeltAlert) seat belt remains unbuckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoul-
der part of the seat belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
(Continued)
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take
it to your authorized dealer immediately and have
it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing inter-
nal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
•
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury.
A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal
injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear
the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest
bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
WARNING! (Continued)
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be re-
placed immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Positioning The Lap Belt
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180° to
create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occu-
pant, it must be removed.
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender
(Continued)
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
if, when worn, the distance between the front edge
of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the seat belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the seat belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat
belt in the event of a collision. These devices may
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions that
may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of
a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner.
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) — If Equipped
The seat belt in the passenger seating position is
equipped with a switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system.
Refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle
Seat Belt” in the “Child Restraints” section of this manual
for additional information. The table below defines the
type of feature for each seating position.
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so
as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you
will hear a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow
the webbing to retract completely in this case and then
carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary
to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section.
Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
⬙click.⬙
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is auto-
matically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The Automatic
Locking Mode is available on all passenger seating
positions with a combination lap/shoulder belt. Use the
Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is
installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this
feature. Children 12 years old and under should always
be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-
ture or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the proce-
dures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraints that have a harness for restraining
the child.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Advanced Front Air Bags
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Seat Belt Pretenioners
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Occupant Classification System
Advanced Front Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air Bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passen-
ger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instru-
ment panel, above the glove compartment. The words
SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Impact Bolster
Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Advanced Air Bag Features
This vehicle has an Occupant Classification System
(“OCS”) in the right front passenger seat. The OCS is
designed to deactivate the front Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag for an unoccupied seat and for occupants
classified in a category other than a properly seated
adult. This could be a child, teenager, or even an adult.
The Passenger Air Bag Disable (“PAD”) Indicator Light
(an amber light located in the center of the instrument
panel) tells the driver and front passenger when the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. The
PAD Indicator Light illuminates the words “PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF” to show that the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag will not inflate during a collision.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel,
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bags to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
WARNING! (Continued)
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Al-
ways wear your seat belts even though you have air
bags.
Advanced Front Air Bag Operation
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-
tional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk
of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced
Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Occupant Classification System (OCS) - Front
Passenger Seat
The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system for
this vehicle. It is designed to deactivate the front passen-
ger Advanced Front Air Bag for an unoccupied seat and
for occupants classified in a category other than a prop-
erly seated adult. This could be a child, teenager, or even
an adult.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of the
following:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Occupant Classification Module (OCM) located under-
neath the front passenger seat
• Bladder located beneath the passenger seat cushion
foam
• Passenger Air Bag Disabled (PAD) Indicator Light – an
amber light located in the center of the instrument
panel
• Air Bag Warning Light
Occupant Classification Module (OCM)
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located
underneath the front passenger seat. The OCM uses
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
input from the Bladder to determine the front passen-
ger’s most probable classification. The OCM communi-
cates this information to the ORC. The ORC may deacti-
vate the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
based on occupant classification.
Bladder
The Bladder is located beneath the passenger seat cush-
ion foam. The Bladder sends signals to the OCM for
classifying the occupant in the front passenger seat. Any
weight on the seat will be sensed by the Bladder. In order
for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important for the
front passenger to be seated properly and properly
wearing the seat belt. Properly seated passengers are:
• Sitting upright
• Facing forward
• Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfort-
ably on or near the floor
• Sitting with their back against the seat back and the
seat back in an upright position
The Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag may be deacti-
vated if the OCS estimates that:
• The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very
light objects on it
Seated Properly
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing
child restraint
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a child,
including a child seated in a forward-facing child
restraint or booster seat
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a small pas-
senger, including a small adult
• The front passenger is not properly seated or his/her
weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time
Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) System
Passenger Seat Occupant Status Passenger Advanced Air Bag Disabled
Indicator Light (“PAD”) Status
Passenger Air
Bag Status
Unoccupied seat * NOT ILLUMINATED DEACTIVATED
Grocery bags, heavy briefcases, and other
relatively light objects
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Rearward facing infant seat** “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Child, including a child seated in a forward-
facing child restraint or booster seat**
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Small adult “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Properly seated adult NOT ILLUMINATED ACTIVATED
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
* When the right front passenger seat is empty or when
very light objects are placed on the seat, the passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag will not inflate even though the
Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) System Indicator Light
is NOT illuminated.
** It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult,
allowing the deployment of the passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag. Never allow children to ride in the front
passenger seat and never install a child restraint system,
including a rear-facing child restraint, in this vehicle.
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Disabled (PAD)
Indicator Light
The PAD Indicator Light (an amber light located in the
center of the instrument panel) tells the driver and front
passenger when the passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is
deactivated. The PAD Indicator light illuminates the
words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” to show that the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not inflate during
a collision. When the right front passenger seat is empty
or when very light objects are placed on the seat, the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not inflate even
though the PAD Indicator Light is not illuminated.
The PAD Indicator Light should not be illuminated when
an adult passenger is properly seated in the front passen-
ger seat. Drivers and adult passengers should verify that
the PAD Indicator Light is not illuminated when an adult
is riding in the front passenger seat. If an adult is not
seated properly the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
may be deactivated and the PAD Indicator Light will be
illuminated.
The PAD Indicator Light should be illuminated and the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag should be deactivated
for most properly seated and restrained children in the
passenger seat and for most properly installed child
restraint systems. However, under certain conditions,
even with a properly installed child restraint system, the
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
PAD Indicator Light may not be illuminated, even
though the Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. This
can occur if the child restraint is lighter than the lightest
weight necessary to illuminate the PAD Indicator Light.
NEVER assume the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is
deactivated unless the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated
with the words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF.”
If The Pad Indicator Light Is Illuminated For An
Adult Passenger:
If an adult passenger is seated in the passenger seat and
the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated, the passenger
may be sitting improperly. Follow the steps below to
allow the OCS to detect the adult passenger’s seated
weight to activate the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag:
1. Turn off the vehicle and have the adult passenger step
out of the vehicle.
2. Remove any extra materials from the passenger seat,
such as cushions, pads, seat covers, seat massagers,
blankets, extra clothing, etc.
3. Place the seatback in the full upright position.
4. Have the adult passenger sit upright in the passenger
seat, sitting in the center of the seat cushion, with the
passenger’s legs fully extended.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the passenger remain in
this sitting position for two to three minutes after
restarting the vehicle.
WARNING!
• If the PAD Indicator Light remains illuminated for
an adult passenger, have an authorized dealer ser-
vice the air bag system immediately. Failure to do
so may cause serious injury or death. If the PAD
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
WARNING! (Continued)
Indicator Light is illuminated with the words
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” the Passenger Ad-
vanced Front Air Bag will not inflate in the event of
a collision.
• Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of a
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. A deploying
passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death
or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small
Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult,
occupies the passenger seat, the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag may be deactivated. Therefore, the Passen-
ger Advanced Front Air Bag may or may not deploy for
a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult (de-
pending on size), who is seated in the front passenger
seat. This does not mean that the OCS is working
improperly.
The driver and passenger must always pay attention to
the Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) System. The PAD
Indicator Light tells you whether the Passenger Ad-
vanced Front Air Bag is activated or deactivated. If the
PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the words “PAS-
SENGER AIR BAG OFF,” the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag may not inflate in the event of a collision. If the
PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the words “PAS-
SENGER AIR BAG OFF” when an adult is in the front
passenger seat, the front passenger must reposition his/
her body in the seat until the PAD Indicator Light goes
out. This means that the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag is activated. Failure to be properly seated in the
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
passenger seat may prevent the passenger air bag from
deploying.
WARNING!
Occupants in the front passenger seat sitting improp-
erly may deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag. This may result in serious injury or death in
a collision. Always wear your seat belt and sit prop-
erly, with the seat back in an upright position, your
back against the seat back, sitting upright, facing
forward, in the center of the seat, with your feet
comfortably on or near the floor.
Do Not Decrease The Passenger’s Total Seated
Weight On The Passenger Seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly
positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so
may result in serious injury or death. The OCS deter-
mines the most probable classification of the occupant
that it detects. The OCS bladder will detect the front
passenger’s decreased seated weight, which may result
in deactivation of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
in a collision and serious injury or death may result. This
does not mean that the OCS is working improperly.
Decreasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the
front passenger seat may result in deactivation of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Examples of im-
proper front passenger seating include:
• The front passenger’s weight is transferred to another
part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instru-
ment panel)
• The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or turns
to face the rear of the vehicle
• The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full upright
position
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
• Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat
• Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat
and center console
• Anything that may decrease the front passenger’s
seated weight
Do Not Increase The Passenger’s Total Seated
Weight On The Passenger Seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly
positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so
may result in serious injury or death. The OCS deter-
mines the most probable classification of the occupant
that it detects. The OCS bladder will detect the front
passenger’s increased seated weight, which may result in
activation of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a
collision and serious injury or death may result. This
does not mean that the OCS is working improperly.
Increasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the
front passenger seat may result in activation of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag under certain condi-
tions, for example:
• The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or turns
to face the rear of the vehicle
• The front passenger seatback is not in the full upright
position
• The front passenger carries or holds an object while
seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.)
• Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat
• Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat
and center console
• Accessories that may increase the seated weight on the
front passenger seat are attached to the front passenger
seat
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Anything that may increase the front passenger’s
seated weight
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
WARNING!
Placing an object on the floor under the front pas-
senger seat may prevent the OCS from working
properly, which may result in serious injury or death
(Continued)
Not Seated Properly Not Seated Properly
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
in a collision. Do not place any objects on the floor
under the front passenger seat.
The Air Bag Warning Light
in the instrument panel
will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to classify the
front passenger seat status will illuminate whenever
the OCS is unable to classify the front passenger seat
status or when there is a fault present in the OCS
WARNING!
• Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not
come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first
placed in the on position, and stays on after you
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have
an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
• If there is a fault present in the OCS, both the PAD
Indicator Light and the Air Bag Warning Light will
illuminate to show that the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag is deactivated. Should this occur, the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will remain
deactivated until the fault is cleared. This indicates
that you should take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer for service immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS com-
ponents that may affect Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly classify a
front seat passenger, the OCS components must function
as designed.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
• Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
• Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or
cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for the
specific model being repaired. Always use the correct
seat cover and cushion specified for the vehicle.
• Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
• Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
• At no time should any supplemental restraint system
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener
be modified or replaced with any part except those
which are approved by FCA US LLC.
If the seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service for any
reason, take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only
FCA US LLC approved seat accessories may be used.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the passenger seat assembly, its related components,
seat cover or cushion may inadvertently change the
air bag deployment in case of a frontal collision. This
could result in death or serious injury to the front
passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A
modified vehicle may not comply with required
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS)
and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(CMVSS).
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Door-Integrated Side Air Bags
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Door-
Integrated Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head injury to front
seat outboard occupants in certain side impacts. SABICs
may reduce the risk of injuries in certain side impacts, in
addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the
seat belts and body structure. The SABICs are located in
the door trim below the side windows. The trim covering
the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Door-Integrated Side Air Bag Label
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain side impact events.
The SABICs deploy upward, covering the side windows.
An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the trim
out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs
inflate with enough force to injure you if you are not
belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in
the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
SABICs are designed to activate in certain side impacts.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”) determines
whether the deployment of the SABIC in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the severity and
type of collision. The side impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining the appropriate response to impact events.
The system is calibrated to deploy the SABIC on the
impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require
SABIC occupant protection. In side impacts, the SABICs
deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left
side SABIC only and a right-side impact deploys the
right side SABIC only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a
good indicator of whether or not SABICs should have
deployed.
SABICs will not deploy in all side collisions, including
some collisions at certain angles, or some side collisions
that do not impact the area of the passenger compart-
ment. SABICs may deploy during angled or offset frontal
collisions where the Advanced Front Air Bags deploy.
SABICs are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system.
SABICs deploy in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. Occupants, including children, who are up against
or very close to SABICs can be seriously injured or killed.
Occupants, including children, should never lean on or
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the
side air bags inflate, even if they are in an infant or child
restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are
necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
help keep you in position, away from an inflating SABIC.
To get the best protection from the SABICs, occupants
must wear their seat belts properly and sit upright with
their backs against the seats. Children must be properly
restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is
appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Door-Integrated Side Air Bag Inflat-
able Curtains (SABICs). Do not stack luggage or
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
other cargo up high enough to block the deploy-
ment of the SABICs. The door trim below the side
windows where the SABIC and its deployment
path are located, should remain free from any
obstructions.
• SABICs need room to inflate. Do not lean against
the door or window. Sit upright in the center of the
seat.
• Being too close to the SABICs during deployment
could cause you to be severely injured or killed.
• Relying on the SABICs alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The SABICs work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, SABICs won’t deploy at all. Al-
ways wear your seat belt even though you have
SABICs.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious to you, but
they will open during air bag deployment.
If A Deployment Occurs
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision, which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to fric-
tion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and
normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed
significantly within a few days, or if you have any
blistering, see your doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
structions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de-
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imme-
diately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
System serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-
tem perform the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition is placed in the “OFF” position.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition is placed in
the “OFF” position.
• Unlock the doors automatically.
System Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition must be changed
from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
Air Bag Warning Light
The air bags must be ready to inflate for your
protection in a collision. The Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition is in the START
or ON/RUN position. If the ignition is in the OFF
position or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not
on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition is first placed in the
ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a mal-
function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunc-
tion is detected that could affect the air bag system. The
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN position.
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protec-
tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first placed in
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
the on position, and stays on after you start the
vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system immedi-
ately.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
WARNING! (Continued)
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with dis-
abilities, contact your authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was pushing the accelera-
tor and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children.
Every state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in proper
restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be pros-
ecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult seat belt. Always check the child seat
Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat
for your child. Carefully read and follow all the instruc-
tions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual
and on all the labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
•
For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org
or call 1–866–SEATCHECK (732–8243). Canadian resi-
dents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for
additional information:
• www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/
safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached the
height or weight limits of their child re-
straint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years old
or who have out-grown the height or
weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are
too small to properly fit the vehicle’s
seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the ve-
hicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
Children Too Large for
Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat
of the vehicle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
tion are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-
ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the seat belt
out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or
neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or
use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking
Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints” for ad-
ditional information on ALR.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a
forward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the
Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using
the seat belt to install a forward facing
child restraint, up to the recommended
weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the head restraints be removed? No
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten
the seat belt against the belt path of the
child restraint?
No
Installing A Child Restraint with A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. Move the vehicle seat as far rearward as
possible to keep the child as far from the advanced
passenger air bag as possible.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
to any location in front of the car seat, including the
seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the
section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
WARNING! (Continued)
(LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of ap-
proved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
There is a tether strap anchor located behind
the child tether access cover behind the passen-
ger seat. To attach a child restraint tether strap
to the anchor:
1. Move the seat forward.
2. Move the seatback to its full forward position.
3. Remove the child tether access cover by prying either
side with a screwdriver or similar tool, as shown.
Child Seat Tether Access Cover
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: While the child tether is in use, keep the access
cover in a safe place so that it can be replaced after use of
the child tether.
4. Pass the child restraint tether hook through either
opening in the seatback underneath the head restraint.
5. Attach the tether hook to the anchor loop.
6. Move the seat to its farthest rearward position. Apply
body pressure to the seat to be sure the seat adjusters
have latched.
7. Return the seatback to an upright position.
Child Seat Tether Anchor
Tether Hook
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
8. Remove slack from the tether strap according to the
child restraint manufacturer’s directions.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly be-
hind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the drivetrain
(engine, transmission, and rear axle) in your new vehicle.
Following these few simple guidelines is all that is
necessary for a good break-in.
For the first 500 miles (800 km):
• Keep your vehicle speed below the legal, posted speed
limit and your engine speed below 4,000 RPM.
• Avoid driving at a constant speed, either fast or slow,
for long periods.
• Do not make any full throttle starts and avoid full
throttle acceleration.
• Use the proper gear for your speed range.
• Wait until the engine has reached normal operating
temperature before driving at the recommended maxi-
mum break-in speed.
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Avoid excessive idling.
• Check the engine oil level at every fuel fill.
NOTE: A new engine will consume some oil during the
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as a sign of difficulty.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
WARNING! (Continued)
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for four to eight
seconds for a bulb check when the ignition is first cycled
to ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
on while driving, have the system checked by an autho-
rized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper-
able.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the foot well of
your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal
area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that
they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the
pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other
ways.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for
cuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness.
Check the tires for proper pressure.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS .............................88
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror ..............88
▫ Outside Mirrors .......................89
▫ Power Mirrors ........................90
▫ Vanity Mirror .........................91
䡵 SEATS ...............................92
▫ Manual Seats .........................92
▫ Power Seats ..........................94
▫ Non-Adjustable Head Restraints ...........96
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD .........97
䡵 LIGHTS ..............................99
▫ Headlight Switch ......................99
▫ Automatic Headlights ..................100
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) .............100
▫ Headlight Time Delay ..................101
▫ Daytime Running Lights ................102
▫ Lights-On Reminder ...................102
▫ Multifunction Lever ...................102
▫ Turn Signals .........................103
3
▫ High/Low Beam Switch ................103
▫ Flash-To-Pass ........................103
▫ Interior Lights .......................103
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ......106
▫ Intermittent Wiper System ...............106
▫ Wiper Operation ......................106
▫ Mist Feature .........................107
▫ Windshield Washers ...................107
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) .............108
䡵 TILT STEERING COLUMN ...............109
䡵 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS ..................110
▫ Adjustable Foot Rest ...................112
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL ...........112
▫ To Activate ..........................113
▫ To Set A Desired Speed .................114
▫ To Deactivate.........................114
▫ To Resume Speed......................114
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ...............114
▫ To Accelerate For Passing ................116
䡵 PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA —
IF EQUIPPED .........................116
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .118
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . .119
▫ Programming A Rolling Code .............120
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code .........122
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming ......123
▫ Using HomeLink® ....................125
▫ Security ............................125
▫ Troubleshooting Tips ...................125
▫ General Information....................126
䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS ...........127
▫ Auxiliary Jumper Harness ...............129
䡵 CUPHOLDERS — IF EQUIPPED ...........131
䡵 STORAGE ............................132
▫ Glove Compartment ...................132
▫ Console Features ......................133
▫ Door Storage.........................135
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES ..............135
▫ Rear Window Defroster .................135
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
MIRRORS
Automatic Dimming Mirror
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. This feature will be defaulted
on, and only be disabled when the vehicle is moving in
reverse.
If Equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and
a 9-1-1 button.
9-1-1 Call
Push the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call
system initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the
9-1-1 Call connection, push the 9-1-1 Call button on the
Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the
touch screen.
Assist Calls
The ASSIST Button is used for contacting Roadside
Assistance, Vehicle Care and Uconnect® Care. The 9-1-1
Button connects you to emergency services to someone
who can help. Roadside Assistance will know what
vehicle you’re driving and its location. Additional fees
may apply for roadside Assistance.
• Uconnect® Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support
for Uconnect® Access and Uconnect® Access Via
Mobile features.
• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in the passenger side mirror.
Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls are located on the driver-side
door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but-
tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, push either the L (left) or R (right) to select the
mirror that you want to adjust.
NOTE: A light in the selected button will illuminate
indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
Power Mirror Controls
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to
move.
Vanity Mirror
A vanity mirror is on the passenger side sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the
mirror cover upward.
Vanity Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Manual Seats
Forward And Rearward Adjustment
The adjusting bar is at the front of the seat, near the floor.
Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rearward.
Release the bar once the seat is in the desired position.
Then, using body pressure, move forward and rearward on
the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
Seat Adjustment Bar
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Height Adjustment
The seat height adjustment lever is located on the out-
board side of the seat. Pull upward on the lever to raise
the seat height or push downward on the lever to lower
the seat height.
Recliner Adjustment
The recliner lever is located on the outboard side of the
seat. To recline the seat, lean forward slightly, pull the
recliner lever upward, lean backward until the seat is in
the desired position, and release the lever. To return the
Height Adjustment Lever
Recline Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
seat to its full upright position, lean forward, pull the
recliner lever upward and hold it until the seat returns to
its full upright position.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
Power Seats
On models equipped with power seats, the power seat
switch is located on the outboard side of the seat near the
floor.
Power Seat Switch
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
Reclining The Seatback Forward Or Rearward
The seatback can be reclined both forward and rearward.
Push the power seat recliner switch forward or rearward,
the seatback will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position has been
reached.
Power Seat Recliner Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Non-Adjustable Head Restraints
The non-adjustable head restraints are form fitted into
the upper structure of the seatback and are designed to
reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in
the event of a rear impact. The seatback should be
properly adjusted to an upright position where the head
restraint is positioned as close as possible to the back of
your head.
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is locked securely into
position. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the
proper stability for passengers. An improperly
latched seatback could cause serious injury.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
1. Reach into the back side area of the drivers front
fender to gain access to the hood release lever.
2. Pull the hood release lever rearward to release the
hood latches.
Hood Release Lever Location
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
3. Lift the hood upward to the full forward position. NOTE: The recommended lift point is to place the lifting
hand forward of one of the wiper arms and pull up. The
assist props will help raise and hold the hood to a normal
usage position.
Hood Release Lever Opened Hood
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Do not leave the hood open in areas where strong
gust of wind are likely. Such a place might be by
the side of the road where large trucks pass by.
Strong gusts of wind may damage the hood.
Always close the hood in such situations.
• To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood
to close it. Simply lower the hood until it is open
approximately 18 in (46 cm) and then drop it. This
should secure both latches. If both latches did not
secure, a slight push effort in the same area used
for opening the hood (front of wiper arm) needs to
be applied to secure the latches. Never drive the
vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both
latches engaged.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights, instru-
ment panel lights, instrument panel light dimming and
interior lights.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
headlight, parking light and instrument panel light op-
eration.
Automatic Headlights
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the A
(AUTO) position. When the system is on, the headlight
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after placing the ignition
in the OFF position. To turn the Automatic system off,
move the headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-
lights will come on in the automatic mode.
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is
placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature
Headlight Switch
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
is set to ON. In addition, the headlights will turn off
when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by
this feature.
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to
“Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable Fea-
tures” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your
vehicle in an unlit area.
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF
position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off
the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval
begins when the headlight switch is turned off.
If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place
the ignition in ACC or RUN, the system will cancel the
delay.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE:
• The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of
placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this
feature.
• The headlight delay time is programmable using the
Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
Daytime Running Lights
The LED Daytime Running Lights will come on when-
ever the engine is running and the park brake is off. The
headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime
driving.
NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can
be turned on and off using the Uconnect® System, refer
to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert
the driver when the driver’s door is opened.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Multifunction Lever
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the Driver
Information Display (DID) and a continuous chime
will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile
(1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is
released.
Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to
the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights
were switched on manually or are on because a door is
open. This includes the glove box light and the trunk
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
light. To restore interior light operation, either place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position or cycle the light
switch.
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is
located on the left side of the instrument panel. Rotating
the dimmer control upward with the parking lights or
headlights on will increase the brightness of the instru-
ment panel lights and ambient lighting.
Interior Light Control
Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the
second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
position.
Dimmer Control
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom OFF
position. The interior lights will remain off when the
doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to
the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays
such as the odometer, Driver Information Display (DID),
and radio when the position lights or headlights are on.
Interior Lights
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers
and washer when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
or ACC position. The multifunction lever is located on
the left side of the steering column.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be-
tween cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunc-
tion lever to the first detent position, and then turn the
end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There
are four delay settings, which allow you to regulate the
wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second
to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between
cycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when
the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first
detent, past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper
operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent
settings for high-speed wiper operation.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than off.
• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the “Park” posi-
tion before turning off the engine. If the wiper
switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the
windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur
when the vehicle is restarted.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Mist Feature
When a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from
a passing vehicle is needed, push the washer knob,
located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to
the first detent and release. The wipers will cycle one
time and automatically shut off.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Windshield Washers
To use the windshield washer, push the washer knob,
located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to
the second detent. Washer fluid will be sprayed and the
wiper will operate for two to three cycles after the washer
knob is released from this position.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
If the washer knob is depressed while in the delay range,
the wiper will operate for several seconds after the
washer knob is released. It will then resume the intermit-
tent interval previously selected. If the washer knob is
pushed while in the off position, the wiper will turn on
and cycle approximately three times after the wash knob
is released.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is
placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature
is set to ON. In addition, the headlights will turn off
when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by
this feature.
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to
“Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable Fea-
tures” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TILT STEERING COLUMN
The tilt release lever is located below the multifunction
lever on the left side of the steering column. To tilt the
column, simply pull the release lever rearward toward
you and then move the steering wheel upward or down-
ward as desired. When the column is in the desired
position, push the release lever forward to lock the
column firmly in place.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
(Continued)
Tilt Steering Column Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
WARNING! (Continued)
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a
greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and
seat position. This feature allows the brake, accelerator,
and clutch pedal to move toward or away from the driver
to provide improved position with the steering wheel.
The adjustable pedal switch is located to the left side of
the steering column.
Push the switch forward to move the pedals forward
(toward the front of the vehicle).
Push the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward
(toward the driver).
• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
Adjustable Pedals Switch
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control Sys-
tem is on. The following messages will be displayed in
the Driver Information Display (DID) if the pedals are
attempted to be adjusted when the system is locked
out (“Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control
Engaged” or “Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In
Reverse”).
NOTE:
• Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full
pedal travel.
• Further small adjustments may be necessary to find
the best possible seat/pedal position.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become lim-
ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
adjustable pedal’s path.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
Adjustable Foot Rest
This feature allows the driver to adjust the foot rest
forward or backward and to rotate it upward or down-
ward to allow for greater driving comfort.
To adjust the pedal:
1. Adjust the seat and steering column to a comfortable
position.
2. Using a socket wrench, loosen the nut on the pedal.
3. Slide the pedal either forward or backward and rotate
it upward or downward as desired.
4. Tighten the nut, being careful not to over tighten it.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Adjustable Foot Rest
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple speed control buttons are pushed at the
same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button to activate the Electronic Speed
Control. The Cruise Indicator Light in the Driver Infor-
mation Display (DID) will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF 2 — RES +
4 — CANCEL 3 — SET -
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, push the SET (-) button
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pushing the SET (-) button.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, manually accelerating 10 mph (16 km/h) above
the set speed or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control with-
out erasing the set speed memory.
Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition
switch OFF erases the set speed memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “ Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The speed increment shown is dependent on the selected
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a
1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can de-
crease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “ Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the selected
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result ina1mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Push the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
NOTE: If the accelerated speed goes above 10 mph
(16 km/h) of the set speed, the Electronic Speed Control
will deactivate.
PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever/gear selector is put into REVERSE. The
ParkView® camera is located on the rear of the vehicle
above the rear license plate. The image will be displayed
in the touchscreen display along with a caution note to
“check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen.
After five seconds this note will disappear.
NOTE: The ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera has pro-
grammable modes of operation that may be selected
through the Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect®
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay
feature and it is turned ON, the rear camera image will be
displayed for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted
out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed ex-
ceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
⬙PARK⬙ or the vehicle’s ignition is placed to the OFF
position.
When the Vehicle is shifted out of Reverse (with camera
delay turned OFF) the rear camera mode is exited and the
last touchscreen appears again.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its
projected backup path based on the steering wheel
position.
When enabled, fixed guide lines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob-
structions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView® camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView® to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-
mended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView®.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water,
and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motor-
ized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt
battery.
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The HomeLink® buttons, located on the sunvisor, desig-
nate the three different HomeLink® channels. The
HomeLink® indicator is located above the center button.
NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is active.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
Ensure your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmis-
sion of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
system.
To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink®
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds, or until the red
indicator flashes.
HomeLink® Buttons Sunvisor
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manu-
factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held
transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
cator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN-
ING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
activates, programming is complete.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not acti-
vate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to
complete the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
steps.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you would
like to program while keeping the HomeLink® indi-
cator light in view.
3. Simultaneously push and hold both the HomeLink®
button you want to program and the hand-held trans-
mitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
cator light. HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Non — Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
For vehicle’s equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, place
the ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink®
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button,
while you press and release (“cycle”) your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi-
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
door may open and close while you are programming.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pushed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
Using HomeLink®
To operate, push and release the programmed
HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the
programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate opera-
tor, security system, entry door lock, home/office light-
ing, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may
also be used at any time.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
here are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmit-
ter.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515
or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety
information or assistance.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci-
fications were met.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with two 12 Volt (13 Amp)
power outlet that can be used to power cellular phones,
small electronics and other low powered electrical acces-
sories.
One power outlet is located on the center console to the
right of the shifter. Push down on the power outlet to
access the opening. Push down on it again to close. This
power outlet is powered when the ignition is in the ON
or ACC position.
The second power outlet is located between the seat
backs above the cup holders. This power outlet is con-
nected directly by the battery and powered at all times.
Front Power Outlet
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
NOTE: Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will
need to be replaced.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
(Continued)
Center Console Outlet
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the bat-
tery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
Auxiliary Jumper Harness
The SRT Viper is equipped with an auxiliary power
jumper, allowing an electronic device to be directly
connected to the vehicle without having to use the
console power outlets. Power to the device will be
controlled by the ignition switch.
NOTE: The electronic device must draw less than five
amps to prevent damage.
To install, remove the mirror cover by pulling straight
down and separating the cover pieces.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
Connect the auxiliary port jumper into the unused con-
nector taped to the wiring bundle. Connect the other end
of the auxiliary port jumper to the electronic device.
NOTE: The red wire in the bundle is the power wire and
will provide the positive 12 volts to the electronic device.
Mirror Cover Removal
Auxiliary Port Jumper
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Re-install the mirror cover and be sure to not pinch the
wires that go into the electronic device.
CUPHOLDERS — IF EQUIPPED
There are two cupholders located in the rear of the center
console.
Mirror Cover Installation
Center Console Cupholders
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
An electronic glove compartment is located on the pas-
senger side of the instrument panel. Push in the button to
open the glove compartment.
NOTE: The glove compartment will lock with the door
locks unless the key fob is detected inside the vehicle.
Glove Compartment
Opened Glove Compartment
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Console Features
Console Cubby Bin — If Equipped
An open storage area, or cubby bin, is located in the
center console rearward of the shift lever.
Cargo Net Storage — If Equipped
There is a cargo net storage area located between the
driver and passengers seat.
Center Console Cubby Bin Location
Cargo Net Storage Location
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
Storage Bin — If Equipped
There is a storage bin located between the driver and
passengers seat. Pull up on the release lever to open the
storage bin.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
ment lid in the open position. Driving with the
console compartment lid open may result in injury in
a collision.
Storage Bin Location
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Door Storage
The door panels contain storage areas located in the
lower center area of the door panel.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate control panel. Push this button to turn
on the rear window defroster. An indicator in the button
will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after ap-
proximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of
operation, push the button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
Door Panel Storage
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES ..........140
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER .................141
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS .....142
䡵 DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID) .....154
▫ DID Display .........................156
▫ Driver Information Display (DID) Messages . . .158
▫ DID Yellow Telltales....................160
▫ DID Red Telltales......................160
▫ DID Green Telltales ....................162
▫ Driver Information Display (DID) Selectable
Menu Items..........................162
䡵 Uconnect® SETTINGS....................171
▫ Buttons On the Faceplate ................172
▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen..............172
▫ Customer Programmable Features/Personal
Settings — Uconnect® 8.4 System Settings . . . .172
▫ SRT Performance Pages .................186
䡵 Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED ........190
䡵 iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . .190
4
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS ......191
▫ Radio Operation ......................192
䡵 RADIO ANTENNA .....................192
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE
PHONES ............................192
▫ General Information ...................193
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS ...................193
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC).......193
▫ Summer Operation ....................199
▫ Winter Operation......................199
▫ Vacation/Storage .....................199
▫ Window Fogging and Frosting ............199
▫ Outside Air Intake .....................200
▫ Control Setting Suggestions for Various
Weather Conditions ...................200
䡵 Uconnect® VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS ................................201
▫ Introducing Uconnect® .................201
▫ Get Started ..........................202
▫ Basic Voice Commands..................202
▫ Radio ..............................203
▫ Media..............................204
▫ Phone..............................205
▫ Voice Text Reply ......................206
▫ Climate (8.4AN) ......................207
▫ Navigation (8.4AN) ....................208
▫ Uconnect® Access* (8.4AN) ..............208
138 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Register (8.4AN) ......................209
▫ Mobile App (8.4AN) ...................210
▫ Voice Texting (8.4AN)...................211
▫ Yelp® (8.4AN) ........................212
▫ SiriusXM Travel Link™ (8.4AN) ...........213
▫ Additional Information .................214
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Air Outlet 6 — Passenger Air Bag 11 — Climate Controls
2 — Sound System Speaker 7 — Glove Compartment 12 — Dimmer Controls
3 — Instrument Cluster 8 — Uconnect® System 13 — Headlight Switch
4—
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Start/Stop Button
9 — Uconnect® System Hard Controls
5 — Glove Compartment Lock 10 — Switch Bank (Screen Off, Hazard
Switch, Back Button)
140 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
2. Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition is first cycled
to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during
starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
3. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition is first cycled to ON/RUN, this
light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a
bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s
seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb
check or when driving, if the driver’s seat belt remains
unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate,
and the chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
4. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn
signal when the turn signal lever is operated.
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle
is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal
on, a continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the
signals off. If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check
for a defective outside light bulb.
Both turn signal arrows will flash in unison with the front
and rear turn signals when the HAZARD WARNING
button is operated.
NOTE: Leaving the hazard flashers on for extended
periods will wear down the battery.
142 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN
position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on
momentarily each time the ignition is cycled to
ON/RUN.
• Each time the ignition is cycled to ON/RUN, the
ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off
previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
6. Driver Information Display (DID) Menu Set (Select-
able ICONS)
The DID displays are located in the center portion of the
cluster and consists of eight section:
• Speedometer (Digital or Analog) (km/h or mph)
• Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will
illuminate in gray under normal conditions, yellow
for non critical warning, red for critical warnings and
white for on demand information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143
• Selectable Information (Compass, Temp, Range, to
Empty, Trip A, TripB–ifequipped, Average MPG)
• Menu Titles / Odometer
• U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser
the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven.
If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced,
the repair technician should leave the odometer
reading the same as it was before the repair or
service. If s/he cannot do so, then the odometer must
be set at zero, and a sticker must be placed in the
door jamb stating what the mileage was before the
repair or service. It is a good idea for you to make a
record of the odometer reading before the repair/
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly
reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the
odometer must be reset at zero
• Menu Set (Selectable Icons)
• Reconfigurable Telltales
• Audio / Phone Information
• Sub-menu Current Position — Whenever there are
sub-menus available, the position within the sub-
menus is here
Refer to Driver Information Display (DID) in this section
for further information.
7. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on, it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
144 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi-
tion.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
8. Tachometer
This gauge measures engine revolutions-per-minute
(RPM x 1000).
9. Oil Pressure Gauge Warning Light
Oil Pressure Primary Gauge and Secondary gauge
Warning The Oil pressure Primary and Secondary gage
indicate the oil current pressure. When the oil pressure
falls below a specific value (currently 10 psi), both of the
gauges will light up RED and flash for about 3 seconds.
This oil pressure indication may also occur when the
engine is first started. If the gauges turn RED while
driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon
as possible
10. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-
mately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
until the vehicle is disarmed.
146 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
11. High Beam Indicator
This indicator shows that the high beam head-
lights are on. Push the multifunction lever for-
ward to switch the headlights to high beam, and pull
toward yourself (normal position) to return to low beam.
12. Fuel Gauge/Fuel Door Reminder
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition is in the ON/RUN position. The arrow in this
symbol is a reminder that the Fuel Filler Door is located
on the left side of the vehicle.
13. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If
Equipped
Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires).
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replace-
ment or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-
market tire sealant it is recommended that you take
(Continued)
148 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION! (Continued)
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
14. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system, called OBD, that
monitors engine control systems. The light will
illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position,
before engine start. If the bulb does not come on when
cycling the ignition from OFF to ON/RUN, have the
condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as poor fuel quality, may illumi-
nate the MIL after engine start. The vehicle should be
serviced if the light stays on through several of your
typical driving cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will
drive normally and will not require towing.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149
15. Electronic Speed Control Indicator Lights
• Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is ON. Refer to “Electronic
Speed Control” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• Electronic Speed Control SET Indicator
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is SET. Refer to “Electronic
Speed Control” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle” for further infor-
mation.
16. Cruise Speed Set Value
Speed value shown when set.
17. DID Amber Telltale Lights
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following DID
Amber Telltale Lights will display:
• Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator — If
Equipped
This light will turn on to indicate the wind-
shield washer fluid is low.
• Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0
gal (11.0 L), this light will turn on and remain
on until fuel is added.
150 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
18. DID Red Telltale Lights
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following DID
Red Telltale Lights will display:
• Engine Temperature
This telltale warns of an overheated engine
condition. As temperatures rise and the gauge
approaches H, or 260°F, this telltale will illu-
minate, and a single chime will sound after reaching
a set threshold. Further overheating will cause the
temperature gauge to pass H, or 260°F.A continuous
chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool.
If the telltale turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off.
Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle
the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return
to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What
To Do In Emergencies” for more information.
• Charging System
This telltale shows the status of the electrical
charging system. If the telltale stays on or
comes on while driving, turn off some of the vehicles
non-essential electrical devices or increase engine
speed (if at idle). If the charging system telltale
remains on, it means that the vehicle is experiencing
a problem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE
IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.
Refer to “Jump Starting Procedures” in “What To Do
In Emergencies” if jump starting is required.
• Oil Pressure Warning
This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure.
If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
chime will sound for four minutes when this light
turns on.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is cor-
rected. This light does not show how much oil is in
the engine. The engine oil level must be checked
under the hood.
• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
This telltale informs you of a problem with
the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) sys-
tem. If the telltale comes on while driving,
have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
If a problem is detected, the telltale will come on
while the engine is running. Cycle the ignition when
the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever
is placed in the NEUTRAL position and the parking
brake applied. The telltale should turn off.
If the telltale remains lit with the engine running,
your vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see
an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If
the telltale is flashing when the engine is running,
immediate service is required. You may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or
engine stall and your vehicle may require towing.
• Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates high engine oil tem-
perature. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as
soon as possible. A chime will sound for
four minutes when this light turns on.
• Door Ajar
This telltale turns on when one or more
doors are ajar. The telltale will show which
doors are ajar.
152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
19. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
is cycled to the ON/RUN position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
20. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the park
lights or headlights are turned on.
21. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
Light
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con-
trol (ESC) is off.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153
DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID)
The Driver Information Display (DID) features a driver-
interactive display that is located in the instrument
cluster.
This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful
information by pushing the switches mounted on the
steering wheel. The DID consists of the following:
• Tachometer
• MPH/KMH
• Vehicle Information
• Fuel Economy
• Trip A
• Trip B
• Audio
• Stored Messages
• Screen Setup
• Performance
• Diagnostics
• Hibernation
Driver Information Display (DID)
154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
• UP Arrow Button
Push and release the UP arrow button to scroll
upward through the main menu and sub-
menus (Fuel Economy, Trip A, Trip B, Audio,
Stored Messages, Screen Set Up).
• DOWN Arrow Button
Push and release the DOWN arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu and
submenus (Fuel Economy, Trip A, Trip B, Au-
dio, Stored Messages, Screen Set Up).
• RIGHT Arrow Button
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to
access/select the information screens or sub-
menu screens of a main menu item. Push and
hold the RIGHT arrow button for two seconds
to reset displayed/selected features that can be reset.
DID Steering Wheels Controls
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155
• LEFT Arrow Button
Push and release the LEFT arrow button to
return to the main menu from an info screen or
submenu item.
NOTE: Pushing the LEFT arrow button will override the
DID “pop up” messages and return you to the menu
screen.
DID Display
The DID display is located in the center portion of the
instrument cluster and consists of the following sections:
1. Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will
illuminate in grey under normal conditions, yellow for
non critical warnings, red for critical warnings, and
white for on demand information.
DID Display
156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Audio / Phone Information and Sub-menu Informa-
tion — Whenever there are sub-menus available, the
position within the sub-menus is shown here.
3. Reconfigurable Telltales/Information
4. Telltales/Indicators
5. Selectable Information (Tach, Mph/Kmh, Vehicle Info,
Fuel Economy, Trip A, Trip B, Audio, Stored Messages,
Screen Setup, Performance, Diagnostics, Hibernation)
6. Suspension Status — The suspension status icon will
illuminate in this area. Refer to “Starting And Operat-
ing” for further information.
7. ESC Status — The ESC status icon will illuminate in
this area. Refer to “Starting And Operating” for fur-
ther information.
8. Launch Control status when launch control mode is
entered. Refer to “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
The main display area will normally display the main
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
menu. The main display area also displays “pop up”
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn-
ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall
into several categories:
• Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of
the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the
condition that activated it remains active) and can be
reviewed from the “Messages” main menu item. As long
as there is a stored message, an “i” will be displayed in
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157
the DID’s compass/outside temp line. Examples of this
message type are “Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out”
and “Low Tire Pressure.”
NOTE: Pushing the LEFT arrow button will override the
DID “pop up” messages and return you to the menu
screen.
• Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
of this message type are “Turn Signal On” (if a turn signal
is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver leaves the vehicle).
• Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. An
example of this message type is “Automatic High Beams
On.”
Driver Information Display (DID) Messages
• Front Seat Belts Unbuckled
• Driver Seat Belt Unbuckled
• Passenger Seat Belt Unbuckled
• Key Fob Battery Low
• Service Air Bag System
• ESC Status (ESC OFF, ESC ON, ESC SPORT, ESC
TRACK, RAIN MODE) — Refer to “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
• Oil Pressure Low
• Fuel Low
• Service Antilock Brake System
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Cruise Off
158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Cruise Ready
• Cruise Set To XXX MPH
• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire Pressure Warnings
• Service Tire Pressure System
• Parking Brake Engaged
• Brake Fluid Low
• Service Electronic Braking System
• Engine Temperature Hot
• Battery Voltage Low
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Lights On
• Right Turn Signal Light Out
• Left Turn Signal Light Out
• Turn Signal On
• Service Air Bag System
• Service Air Bag Warning Light
• Driver Seat Belt Unbuckled
• Passenger Seat Belt Unbuckled
• Front Seat Belts Unbuckled
• Door Open
• Doors Open
• Engage Park Brake to Prevent Rolling
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159
DID Yellow Telltales
This area will show amber caution telltales. These tell-
tales include:
• Low Fuel Telltale
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal
(11.0 L), this light will turn on, and remain on until
fuel is added.
• Electronic Speed Control Ready
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is ON. Refer to “Electronic Speed
Control” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
DID Red Telltales
This area will show red telltales. These telltales include:
• Door Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate that one or
more doors may be ajar.
• Oil Pressure Warning Light
This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure. If
the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut
off the engine as soon as possible. The selectable gauge
will flash red for 3 seconds if the pressure is 10 psi or less.
The oil level should be checked under this condition.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The oil level should be maintained in the ⬙SAFE⬙ zone at
all times. Oil level below the ⬙SAFE⬙ zone can cause the
oil pressure warning lamp to illuminate under some
conditions and can cause engine damage.
• Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
ing system. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho-
rized dealer.
Refer to “Jump Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” if jump starting is required.
• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
light will come on when the ignition is first
cycled ON and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the
engine is running. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle
has completely stopped and the shift lever is in Neutral,
with the Parking Brake applied. The light should turn off.
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an autho-
rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
required. You may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle or engine stall, and your vehicle
may require towing.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161
• Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge ap-
proaches H, this indicator will illuminate, and a single
chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. Further
overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H,
the indicator will continuously flash, and a continuous
chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve-
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for more information.
DID Green Telltales
• Electronic Speed Control SET
This telltale will illuminate green when the
electronic speed control is SET. Refer to “Elec-
tronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Driver Information Display (DID) Selectable Menu
Items
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until
the desired Selectable Menu icon is highlighted in the
DID.
162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tachometer
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Tachometer icon is highlighted
in the DID. Push and release the RIGHT arrow
button to change the display between full
tachometer or digital speedometer.
MPH To km/h
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the MPH to km/h icon is high-
lighted in the DID. Push and release the OK
button to change the display between MPH
or km/h.
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Vehicle Info icon is highlighted
in the DID. Push and release the RIGHT arrow
button to display the following information
sub-menus:
Tire Pressure
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
“Tire Pressure” is highlighted in the DID. Push and
release the RIGHT arrow button, and one of the follow-
ing will be displayed:
• If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of
the ICON.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163
• If one or more tires have low pressure, the tire pressure
values in each corner of the ICON with the pressure
value of the low tire displayed in a different color than
the other tire pressure value.
• If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service
Tire Pressure System” is displayed.
Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be
reset. Push and release the LEFT arrow button to return
to the main menu.
Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”
under “Starting and Operating” for further information.
Coolant Temperature
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
“Coolant Temperature” is highlighted in the DID. Push
and release the RIGHT arrow button, and the coolant
temperature will be displayed.
Oil Temperature
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
“Oil Temperature” is highlighted in the DID. Push and
release the RIGHT arrow button, and the oil temperature
will be displayed.
Engine Hours
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
“Engine Hours” is highlighted in the DID. Push and
release the RIGHT arrow button, and the oil temperature
will be displayed.
Intake Air Temp.
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
“Intake Air Temp.” is highlighted in the DID. Push and
release the RIGHT arrow button, and the intake air
temperature will be displayed.
164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Current Power
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
“Current Power” is highlighted in the DID. Push and
release the RIGHT arrow button, and the current power
will be displayed.
Current Torque
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
“Current Torque” is highlighted in the DID. Push and
release the RIGHT arrow button, and the current torque
will be displayed.
SRT Performance
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Perfor-
mance Features is intended for off-highway or off-
road use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
used in a controlled environment and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the performance pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the SRT icon is highlighted in the DID. Push and release
the RIGHT arrow button, and 0–60 MPH Duration will be
displayed. Push and release the LEFT and RIGHT arrow
button to scroll through the following information sub-
menus:
0–60 Time
Push and release the LEFT and RIGHT arrow button
until the last 0–60 MPH information is displayed.
Braking Distance
Push and release the LEFT and RIGHT arrow button
until the last Braking Distance information is displayed.
1/4 Mile Elapsed Time
Push and release the LEFT and RIGHT arrow button
until the last 1/4 Mile Top Speed & Duration information
is displayed.
1/8 Mile Elapsed Time
Push and release the LEFT and RIGHT arrow button
until the last 1/8 Mile Top Speed & Duration information
is displayed.
G-Force Instant
Push and release the LEFT and RIGHT arrow button
until the Current G-Forces are displayed.
G-Force Peak
Push and release the LEFT and RIGHT arrow button
until the Peak G-Forces are displayed.
166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Fuel Economy
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Fuel Economy icon is high-
lighted and the following will display:
Range To Empty (RTE)
Average Fuel Economy/Miles Per Gallon (MPG Bar-
graph)
Current Miles Per Gallon (MPG)
Trip A
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Trip A icon is highlighted in
the DID. The Trip A information will display
the following:
• Distance
• Average Speed
• Elapsed Time
Hold the RIGHT arrow button to reset all the informa-
tion.
TripB—IfEquipped
Push and release Up or Down arrow button
until the Trip B icon is highlighted in the DID.
The Trip B information will display the
following:
• Distance
• Average Speed
• Elapsed Time
Hold the RIGHT arrow button to reset all the informa-
tion.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167
Audio
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Audio display icon is high-
lighted in the DID. Push and release the RIGHT
arrow button to display the active source.
Stored Messages
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Messages Menu item is high-
lighted in the DID. This feature shows the
number of stored warning messages. Pushing
the RIGHT arrow button will allow you to see what the
stored messages are.
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
Upper Left
• None
• Compass
• Temperature
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Average Fuel
• Current Fuel
• Trip A
• Trip B
• Elapsed Time
• Oil Pressure
• Oil Temperature
168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Battery
• Coolant Temperature
Upper Right
• None
• Compass
• Temperature
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Average Fuel
• Current Fuel
• Trip A
• Trip B
• Elapsed Time
• Oil Pressure
• Oil Temperature
• Battery
• Coolant Temperature
• RIGHT Arrow Button
Restore To Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default
Settings)
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to
confirm.
Digital Speed
• On
• Off
Tach. Peak Hold
When enabled, the Tach. Peak Hold function marks the
peak Revolutions Per Minute (RPM) on the tachometer
gauge for 3 seconds when the RPM is above 4000. Using
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169
the UP and DOWN arrow switches on the left side of the
steering wheel, select the gauges icon from the menu on
the left side of the cluster (highlighted red is the active
menu item). Use the right arrow to enter the gauges setup
screen and the up down arrows to select Tach Peak from
the menu of gauge options.
Select up and down to toggle between “ON” and “OFF.”
Diagnostic Codes
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Diagnostic Code icon is high-
lighted in the DID. Push and release the RIGHT
arrow button to display any present diagnostic
trouble codes along with a brief definition.
Vehicle Hibernation
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Hibernation icon is highlighted
in the DID. Push and release the RIGHT arrow
button to activate the Vehicle Hibernation
Mode, which minimizes vehicle battery drain while the
vehicle is being stored.
Tach. Peak Hold
170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect® SETTINGS
The Uconnect® system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
the center of the instrument panel that allow you to
access and change the customer programmable features.
NOTE: Many features can vary by vehicle
Uconnect® 8.4AN Buttons On The Touchscreen And
Buttons On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect® Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect® Buttons On The Faceplate
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171
Buttons On the Faceplate
Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect®
system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right
side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instru-
ment panel. Turn the control knob to scroll through
menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the
center of the control knob one or more times to select or
change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect® display.
Customer Programmable Features/Personal
Settings — Uconnect® 8.4 System Settings
Press the “SRT & Apps” button on the touchscreen, then
press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen to display
the menu setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect®
system allows you to access programmable features that
may be equipped such as Display, Voice, Clock, Safety &
Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Engine Off
Options, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth®, SiriusXM Setup, Re-
store Settings, Clear Personal Data, and System Informa-
tion.
NOTE: Only one category may be selected at a time.
To adjust the setting of a programmable feature, press the
desired setting option. Once in the desired setting option,
press and release the preferred setting until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has
been selected.
Once the setting is complete, press the Back Arrow
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu
or press the X button on the touchscreen to close out of
the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow
button on the right side of the screen will allow you to
toggle up or down through the list of available settings.
172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
• Display Mode
This feature will allow you to select one of the auto
display settings. To change Mode status, press and re-
lease the Auto or Manual button on the touchscreen.
Then press the arrow back button on the touchscreen, or
push the back button on the faceplate.
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
This feature will allow you to select the display bright-
ness when the headlights are on. Adjust the brightness
with the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen,
then press the arrow back button on the touchscreen, or
push the back button on the faceplate.
NOTE: The usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause
the radio to activate the “Display Brightness With Head-
lights OFF” control even though the headlights are on.
• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
This feature will allow you to select the display bright-
ness when the headlights are off. Adjust the brightness
with the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen,
then press the arrow back button on the touchscreen, or
push the back button on the faceplate.
• Set Theme — If Equipped
This feature will allow you to choose a theme for the
display screen. The theme will change the background
color, highlight color, and button color of the display
screen.
• Set Language
This feature will allow you to select one of the languages
for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173
and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the Set
Language button on the touchscreen and then press the
desired language button on the touchscreen until a
check-mark appears next to the language, showing that
setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push
the back button on the faceplate.
• Units
This feature will allow you to have the DID, odometer,
and navigation system (if equipped) changed between
US and Metric units of measure. Press US or Metric until
a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push
the back button on the faceplate.
• Touchscreen Beep
This feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the
sound heard when a touchscreen button is pressed. Press
the Touchscreen Beep button on the touchscreen until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push
the back button on the faceplate.
• Control Screen Time-Out — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Controls Screen will
stay open for five seconds before the screen times out.
With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open
until it is manually closed. Press the Control Screen
Time-Out button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu, or push the back button
on the faceplate.
• Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions
will appear in the DID as the vehicle approaches a
174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
designated turn within a programmed route. To turn on
or enable, press the Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has been se-
lected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu or push the back button on
the faceplate.
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Voice Response Length
When in this display, you may change the Voice Re-
sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Length, press the “Brief” or “Detailed” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
• Show Command List
When in this display, you may choose to Always, With
Help, or Never display the Teleprompter with possible
options while in a voice session. To change the Show
Command List settings, press the “Always,” “With
Help,” or “Never” button on the touchscreen until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Clock
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Sync Time With GPS
This feature will allow you to automatically have the
radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting, press
the “Sync with GPS Time” button on the touchscreen
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175
that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
• Set Time Hours
This feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync
with GPS Time” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or
down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu or press the” X” button on
the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen.
• Set Time Minutes
This feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The
“Sync with GPS Time” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or
down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu or press the “X” button on
the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen.
• Time Format
This feature will allow you to select the time format
display setting. Press the “Time Format” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the 12hrs
or 24hrs setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return
to the previous menu, or push the back button on the
faceplate.
Clock
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Sync Time With GPS
This feature will allow the radio to sync time with a GPS
signal. To change the Sync Time setting, press the “Sync
176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
time with GPS” button on the touchscreen until a check-
mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has
been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touch-
screen to return to the previous menu.
• Set Time Hours
This feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync
time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or
down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu.
• Set Time Minutes
This feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The
“Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or
down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu.
• Time Format
This feature will allow you to select the time format
display setting. Press the “Time Format” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the
“12hrs” or “24hrs” setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu.
• Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped
This feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the
digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time
Status setting press the “Show Time in Status Bar” button
on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting has been selected. Press
the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177
Safety & Driving Assistance — If Equipped
After pressing the Safety & Driving Assistance button on
the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• ParkView® Backup Camera Delay
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the previous screen appears again. When the vehicle is
shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned ON),
the rear view image with dynamic grid lines will be
displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
“REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
“PARK” or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
To set the ParkView® Backup Camera Delay press the
“settings” button, then the “Safety & Driving Assistance”
button on the touchscreen. Press the “Parkview Backup
camera Delay” button on the touchscreen to turn the
ParkView® Delay ON or OFF.
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
system is active. To make your selection, press the “Hill
Start Assist” button on the touchscreen until a check-
mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting
has been selected. Press the back arrow/Done button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
• Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
Delay status, press the “+” or “-” button on the touch-
screen to select your desired time interval. Press the back
178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
• Headlight Illumination On Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
press the “+” or “-” button on the touchscreen to select
your desired time interval. Press the back arrow button
on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or
push the back button on the faceplate.
• Headlights With Wipers
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap-
proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, press the Headlights With Wipers button
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
• Daytime Running Lights
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
whenever the vehicle is set in motion. To make your
selection, press the Daytime Running Lights button on
the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
• Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be
selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature
selected. To make your selection, press the Flash Lights
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179
with Lock button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu, or push the back button
on the faceplate.
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available.
• Auto Door Locks
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock auto-
matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h). To make your selection, press the “Auto Door
Locks” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu, or push the back button
on the faceplate.
• Auto Unlock On Exit
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To
make your selection, press the Auto Unlock On Exit
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return
to the previous menu, or push the back button on the
faceplate.
• Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the Passive Entry
Feature. To make your selection, press the Flash Lights
With Lock button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu, or push the back button
on the faceplate.
• Sound Horn With Lock
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the Key Fob Lock button is pressed. To make your
selection, push the Sound Horn With Remote Lock
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return
to the previous menu, or push the back button on the
faceplate.
• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
When ⬙Driver Door⬙ is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks, only the driver’s door will unlock with the first
press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
UNLOCK button. You must press the RKE transmitter
UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
When ⬙All Doors⬙ is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock no matter
which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is pro-
grammed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the
driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press
Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed,
touching the handle more than once will only result in
the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected,
once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/
unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use
RKE transmitter).
• Passive Entry
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles
door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181
Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make
your selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu, or push the back button on the faceplate. Refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle”.
Engine Off Options
After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available.
• Engine Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect® phone system (if equipped),
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
“Engine Off Power Delay” status, press the 0 seconds, 45
seconds, 5 minutes or 10 minutes button on the touch-
screen. Then press the back arrow/Done button on the
touchscreen.
• Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To change the “Headlight Off
Delay” status, press the ⬙Up⬙ or ⬙Down⬙ arrow button on
the touchscreen to select your desired time interval. Press
the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return
to the previous menu.
Audio
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Balance/Fade
This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade
settings. Press and drag the speaker icon, use the arrows
to adjust, or tap the ‘C’ icon to readjust to the center.
• Equalizer
This feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble
settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–” setting
buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on
the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen. Then press the arrow back button on the
touchscreen.
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press
directly on the desired setting.
• Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
press the “Off,” “1,” “2,” or “3” button on the touch-
screen. Then press the arrow back button on the touch-
screen.
• Surround Sound
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
To make your selection, press the Surround Sound button
on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off” followed by
pressing the arrow back button on the touchscreen.
• Loudness
Loudness improves sound quality at lower volumes. To
make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on the
touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or “No.” The button will
highlight indicating that the setting has been selected.
Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen
• AUX Volume Offset
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level
for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183
To make your selection, press the “AUX Volume Match”
button on the touchscreen, choose a level from –3 to +3
followed by pressing the back arrow button on the
touchscreen.
Phone/Bluetooth®
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth®” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Paired Phones
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
• Paired Audio Sources
This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
• Channel Skip
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the
touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip
followed by pressing the back arrow button on the
touchscreen.
• Subscription Information
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen
to access the Subscription Information screen.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
and is available for U.S. residents only.
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Restore Settings
When this feature is selected it will reset the Display,
Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings.
To restore the settings to their default setting, press the
Restore Settings button. A pop-up will appear asking
⬙Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?”
select “Yes” to restore, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the
settings are restored, a pop up appears stating ⬙settings
reset to default.⬙ Press the okay button on the touchscreen
to exit.
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button
on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail-
able:
• Clear Personal Data
When this feature is selected it will remove personal data
including Bluetooth® devices and presets. To remove
personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data”
button and a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure
you want to clear all personal data?” select “OK” to
Clear, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the data has been cleared,
a pop up appears stating ⬙Personal data cleared.”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185
System Information
After pressing the “System Information” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• System Information
When System Information is selected, a System Informa-
tion screen will appear displaying the system software
version.
SRT Performance Pages
To access the SRT Performance Pages, press the “SRT &
Apps” button on the touchscreen then select the “SRT
Performance Pages” App from the list. Press the UP or
DOWN buttons on the touchscreen to cycle through the
list.
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the SRT Per-
formance Pages is intended for off-highway or off-
road use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
used in a controlled environment and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the Performance Pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
The SRT Performance Pages include the following:
• Home
• Timers
• G-Force
186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Gauges 1
• Gauges 2
• Engine
• Options
The following describes each feature and its operation:
Timers
When the Timers Page is selected you will be able to
select from following “Tickets”:
• Current
Pressing the “Current” button displays a “real time”
summary of performance timers.
• Last
Pressing the “Last” button displays the last recorded run
of performance timers.
• Best
Pressing the “Best” button displays the best recorded run
of performance timers, except for braking data.
• Save
Pressing the “Save” button will let you save the last run.
Any saved run over 10, will overwrite the last saved run
for Uconnect® System storage. The operation of the Save
feature is listed below:
• With a USB jump drive installed, press the “USB”
button to save runs to the jump drive.
• With an SD Card installed, press the “SD Card” to save
runs to the SD Card.
• Press the “Uconnect” button to save the runs to the
Owner web page.
• Press the “Cancel” button to view the last timer
“Ticket.”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187
The “Tickets” contain the timers listed below:
• 0-60 MPH (0-100 km/h)
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to
60 mph (0 to 100 km/h).
• ⅛ Mile (200 meter)
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go an ⅛ Mile
(200 meters).
• ¼ mile (400 meter)
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go an ¼ mile
(400 meters).
• Brake Distance
Displays the distance it takes the vehicle to make a full
stop. Contains current and last data for distance and start
– from speed.
NOTE: The distance measurement will be aborted if the
brake pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a
complete stop.
• Brake Speed
Displays the speed the vehicle is traveling when the
brake pedal is depressed.
NOTE: Brake Distance and Speed timers will only dis-
play ⬙ready⬙ when vehicle is traveling at greater than 30
MPH (48 km/h).
G-Force
When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force
values (two lateral and two longitudinal) as well as
steering angle.
When a G-Force greater than zero is measured, the
display will update the value real-time. As the G-Force
falls, the peak forces will continue to display.
188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Gauges 1
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
• Oil Temperature
Displays the actual oil temperature.
• Oil Pressure
Displays the actual oil pressure.
• Battery Voltage
Displays the actual battery voltage.
Gauges 2
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
• Coolant Temperature
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
• Oil Temperature
Displays the actual oil temperature.
• Intake Air Temperature
Displays the actual intake air temperature.
• Oil Pressure
Displays the actual oil pressure.
• Battery Voltage
Displays the actual battery voltage.
Engine
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
• Speed (mph)
Displays the actual speed.
• Horsepower (hp)
Displays the actual horsepower.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189
• Torque (ft-lb)
Displays the actual torque.
• Oil Pressure (psi)
Displays the actual oil pressure.
Options
When selected, this screen allows you to set your SRT
home page picture, and configure the vehicle color.
Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED
For detailed information about your Uconnect® radio,
refer to your Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
SD Card Slot, AUX Jack, And USB Port
1 — SD Card Slot
2 — AUX Jack
3 — USB Port
190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Located at the rear area of the center console, this feature
allows an iPod® or external USB device to be plugged
into the USB port.
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod®
and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions
may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please
visit Apple’s website for software updates.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect® Supple-
ment Manual.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a
push-button in the center. Pushing the top of the switch
will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the
switch will decrease the volume.
Remote Sound System Controls
(Back View Of Steering Wheel)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191
The button located in the center of the right hand control
will switch modes to Radio or other valid audio source.
The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a
push-button in the center. The function of the left hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch
will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left hand control
will tune to the next pre-set station that you have
programmed in the radio pre-set buttons.
RADIO ANTENNA
The am/fm radio antenna is located in the windshield.
The Satellite/Navigation antenna is located in the rear
liftgate, while the cellular phone antenna is on the
windshield behind the interior rearview mirror.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect® (if equipped).
192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the
temperature, amount, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
instrument panel below the radio.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Buttons On The Faceplate
The buttons on the faceplate are located below the
Uconnect® touchscreen.
Automatic Climate Controls
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect® system touchscreen.
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Buttons On The
Faceplate And Buttons On The Touchscreen)
1. MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator
will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
3. Recirculation Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.
Uconnect® Temperature Controls
194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. AUTO Temperature Control
Controls airflow temperature, distribution, volume, and
the amount of air recirculation automatically. Press and
release to select. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for
more information. Performing this function will cause
the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic
modes.
5. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this fea-
ture is ON. Performing this function will cause the ATC
to switch into manual mode. The blower speed may
increase when Defrost mode is selected. If the front
defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return
the previous setting.
6. Rear Defrost Button
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 10 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
(Continued)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
7. Blower Control
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
forced through the climate system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
speeds can be selected using either the buttons on the
faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen as follows:
Button On The Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the control
clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the knob counterclockwise.
Button On The Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
8. Modes
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are
as follows:
• Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individu-
ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air
vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can
be moved up and down or side to side to regulate
airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located
below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount
of airflow from these outlets.
196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con-
ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
warmer air from the floor outlets.
• Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
• Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This mode works best
in cold or snowy conditions.
9. Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
10. Temperature Control Down Button
Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
11. Temperature Control Up Button
Push the button for warmer temperature settings.
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the AUTO
button on the touchscreen on the Automatic Tempera-
ture Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pas-
senger temperature control buttons. Once the desired
temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and
automatically maintain that comfort level.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experi-
ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable
feature. Refer to the “Customer Programmable Fea-
tures — Uconnect® System Settings” in this section of
the manual.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
Recirculation Control
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humid-
ity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to
recirculate interior air by pressing the RECIRCULATION
control button. Recirculation mode should only be used
temporarily. The recirculation LED will illuminate on the
blower control knob when this button is selected. Push
the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation
mode LED and allow outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window
clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled auto-
matically if these modes are selected.
198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro-
sion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is function-
ing properly and the proper amount, type, and concen-
tration of coolant is used. Refer to “Maintenance
Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper
coolant selection. Use of the air Recirculation mode
during Winter months is not recommended because it
may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in
fresh air with the blower setting in high. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging and Frosting
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside of the glass in
mild, rainy and/or humid weather. Windows may frost
on the inside of the glass in very cold weather. To clear
the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase
the front blower speed. Do not use the Recirculation
mode without A/C for long periods, as fogging may
occur.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199
NOTE: Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will au-
tomatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce
or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, can cause
odor, and if they enter the plenum they could plug the
water drains. In winter months, ensure the air intake is
clear of ice, slush and snow.
Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather
Conditions
200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect® VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect®
Start using Uconnect® Voice Recognition with these
helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands
and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect®
8.4AN system.
If you see the
icon on your touchscreen, you have
the Uconnect® 8.4AN system.
Uconnect® 8.4AN
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201
Get Started
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing in-
structions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger con-
versations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned
on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after
the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.
Two buttons are all you need to control your Uconnect®
system with your voice.
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect® system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touch-
screen.
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscrip-
tion or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
Uconnect® 8.4AN
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say “Help.” The system will provide you with
a list of commands.
Media
Uconnect® offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth®
and auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only
available for connected USB and iPod® devices. (Remote
CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands and follow the prompts to
switch your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth®
• Change source to iPod®
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
Uconnect® 8.4AN Radio
204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all
of the music on your iPod® or USB device. Your Voice
Command must match exactly how the artist, album,
song and genre information is displayed.
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy
with Uconnect®. When the Phonebook button is illumi-
nated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button
. After the beep, say one of
the following commands:
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
Uconnect® 8.4AN Media
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
button
and say “Call,” then pronounce the name
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say
“Call John Smith work.”
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect® will announce incoming text messages. Push
the Phone button
and say Listen. (Must have com-
patible mobile phone paired to Uconnect® system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push
the Phone button
. After the beep, say: “Reply.”
2. Listen to the Uconnect® prompts. After the beep,
repeat one of the pre-defined messages and follow the
system prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in Traffic. See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be Late.
Okay. Where are you? I will be <num-
ber> minutes
late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
Uconnect® 8.4AN Phone
206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
I’ll call you
later.
I need
directions.
See you in
<number> of
minutes.
I’m on my way.
Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementa-
tion of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advan-
tage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com. Apple iPhone® iOS6 or later sup-
ports reading incoming text messages only.
Climate (8.4AN)
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-
free and keep everyone comfortable while you keep
moving ahead.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• Set temperature to 70 degrees
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle.
Uconnect® 8.4AN Climate
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207
Navigation (8.4AN)
The Uconnect® navigation feature helps you save time
and become more productive when you know exactly
how to get to where you want to go.
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
. After
the beep, say:
• For the 8.4AN Uconnect® System, say: “Navigate to
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
. After
the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
Uconnect® Access* (8.4AN)
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take
advantage of the Uconnect® Access services in the next
section of this guide. To register with Uconnect® Access,
Uconnect® 8.4AN Navigation
208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
press the SRT & Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen
to get started. Detailed registration instructions can be
found on the next page.
*Uconnect® Access is available only on equipped ve-
hicles purchased within the continental United States and
Alaska. Services can only be used where coverage is
available; see coverage map for details.
9-1-1 Call
Theft Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn and Lights
Yelp® Search
Voice Texting
Roadside Assistance Call
Wi-Fi Hotspot***
**If vehicle is equipped.
***Extra charges apply.
Register (8.4AN)
1. Press the SRT & Apps button on the bottom of the
8.4-inch touchscreen.
2. If a pop-up message appears, press Register or go to
the Favorite Apps menu and press Uconnect® Regis-
tration.
3. Read through the registration instructions. Enter and
confirm your personal email address. Then press
Send.
4. Check your personal inbox for an email from
Uconnect® Access.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209
5. Click on the link inside the email within 72 hours and
complete the easy online registration process to create
a personal Mopar® Owner Connect account linked to
your vehicle.
Mobile App (8.4AN)
Securely link your mobile device to your vehicle with the
Uconnect® Access App. Once you have downloaded the
App, you may start your vehicle or lock it from virtually
any distance. (Vehicle must be properly equipped with
factory-installed Remote Start.)
Uconnect® Registration 8.4AN
Mobile App
210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Download the Uconnect® Access App to a compatible
Apple® or Android® mobile devices. All you need to do
is:
1. After registering with Uconnect® Access, log on to
your Mopar® Owner Connect account at
moparownerconnect.com.
2. On the Dashboard page, enter your mobile phone
number to receive a link to download the App on your
mobile device. Or go to iTunes®, or Google Play, and
search for the Uconnect® Access App.
3. To activate the App, enter your Mopar Owner Connect
user name and password and log in. Your vehicle is
then connected to your mobile device.
Voice Texting (8.4AN)
1. To send a message, push the Phone button
. After
the beep, say the following command: “Send mes-
sage to John Smith.”
2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the
message you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect®
to process your message.
3. The Uconnect® system will repeat your message and
provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or
hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect®
what you’d like to do. For instance, if you’re happy
with your message, after the beep, say: “Send.”
You must be registered with Uconnect® Access and have
a compatible MAP – enabled smartphone to use your
voice to send a personalized text message.
TIP:
• Not compatible with iPhone®.
• Messages are limited to 140 characters.
• The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be
illuminated to use the feature.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
Yelp® (8.4AN)
Once registered with Uconnect® Access, you can use
your voice to search for the most popular places or things
around you.
1. Press the “SRT & Apps” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “All Apps” button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the “Yelp” button on the touchscreen.
4. Once the YELP® home screen appears on the touch-
screen, push the VR button
, then say: “YELP
search.”
5. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell
Uconnect® the place or business that you’d like
Uconnect® to find.
TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the
results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or
Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.
Yelp®
212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SiriusXM Travel Link™ (8.4AN)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings,
check a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast?
SiriusXM Travel Link™ is a suite of services that brings a
wealth of information right to your Uconnect® 8.4AN
system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• Show fuel prices
• Show 5 - day weather forecast
• Show extended weather
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Com-
mand.
SiriusXM Travel Link™
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
Additional Information
© 2014 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp,
Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered
trademarks of Yelp.
Uconnect® System Support:
• U.S. residents call 1-877-855-8400 or visit
DriveUconnect.com
• Canadian residents call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French) or visit DriveUconnect.ca
Mon. – Fri., 7:00 am – 12:00 am, ET
Sat., 8:00 am – 10:00 pm, ET
Sun., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET
Uconnect® Access Services Support 1-855-792-4241.
Please have your Uconnect® Security PIN ready when
you call.
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES ................218
▫ Normal Starting.......................218
▫ If Engine Fails To Start .................220
▫ After Starting ........................221
䡵 MANUAL TRANSMISSION ...............221
▫ Shifting.............................222
▫ Recommended Shift Speeds ..............223
▫ Skip Shift Indicator Light ...............224
䡵 STREET/RACE MODE — IF EQUIPPED ......225
䡵 LAUNCH MODE .......................226
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES .........228
▫ Acceleration .........................228
▫ Traction ............................228
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER .............229
▫ Flowing/Rising Water ..................229
▫ Shallow Standing Water .................230
䡵 POWER STEERING .....................231
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check ..............232
䡵 PARKING BRAKE ......................233
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM .......................235
5
▫ Brake Pad Break-In ....................235
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .236
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System ................237
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) ............239
▫ Electronic Stability Control ..............239
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION .............243
▫ Tire Markings ........................243
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN)...........247
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions ..........248
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ...........250
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION ........254
▫ Tire Pressure ........................254
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures .................256
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .257
▫ Radial Ply Tires ......................258
▫ Tire Types ...........................258
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped .............260
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped ...............261
▫ Tire Spinning ........................263
▫ Tread Wear Indicators ..................263
▫ Life Of Tire .........................264
▫ Replacement Tires .....................265
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) .......266
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS .....267
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .268
▫ Premium System ......................271
216 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS ..................274
▫ 8.4L Engine ..........................274
▫ Reformulated Gasoline .................274
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ..............275
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles .......275
▫ MMT In Gasoline .....................276
▫ Materials Added To Fuel ................276
▫ Fuel System Cautions...................277
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings .............278
䡵 ADDING FUEL ........................278
▫ Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release.........280
䡵 TRAILER TOWING .....................282
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) ...................283
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
(Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The
Ground) ...........................283
䡵 GROUND CLEARANCE .................284
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 217
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct any other occupant to buckle their seat
belt.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Do not leave the Key Fob in
or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to
children), and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Long periods of engine idling, especially at higher
than normal engine idle speeds, can cause excessive
exhaust temperatures, which can damage your ve-
hicle. Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the
engine running.
Normal Starting
CAUTION!
The engine in your vehicle is designed for operation
down to 0°F (-18°C). Starting the engine below 0°F
(-18°C) coolant temperature creates a potential for
scuffing or seizing of internal components in this
high performance engine. To prevent engine damage,
do not start the engine at temperatures below 0°F
(-18°C).
218 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• You must disarm the security system in order to start
the engine. Refer to “Security Alarm System” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
• Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does
not require pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.
However, if the engine has not started within three
seconds, slightly press the accelerator pedal while
continuing to crank. If the engine fails to start within
15 seconds, wait five seconds, then repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.
To Start The Engine:
1. Fully apply the parking brake.
2. Press the clutch pedal to the floor.
NOTE: The engine will not start unless the clutch pedal
is pressed to the floor.
3. Place the shift lever in NEUTRAL.
4. Press the red ENGINE START/STOP button located
on the instrument panel. Release the button when the
engine starts.
Engine START/STOP Button
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 219
If Engine Fails To Start
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic
converter and once the engine has started, ignite
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
and damage the converter and vehicle. If the ve-
hicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may
be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or
the battery in another vehicle. This type of start can
be dangerous if done improperly, so follow this
procedure carefully. Refer to “Jump Starting” in
“What To Do In Emergencies” for further informa-
tion.
If the engine is flooded, it may start to run, but not have
enough power to continue running when the ENGINE
START button is released. If this occurs, continue crank-
ing up to 15 seconds with the accelerator pedal pushed
all the way to the floor. Release the accelerator pedal and
the ENGINE START button once the engine is running
smoothly.
220 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15
second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal
held to the floor, the “Normal Starting” procedure should
be repeated.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
NOTE: The parking brake should be engaged and the
shift lever placed into REVERSE before leaving the
vehicle, especially when parked on an incline.
Your vehicle is equipped with a high torque capacity dual
disc clutch. The clutch pedal must be fully pressed to the
floor during each shift. As you release the clutch pedal,
lightly press the accelerator pedal.
CAUTION!
• Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch
pedal, or try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the
clutch pedal partially engaged, as this will cause
abnormal wear on the clutch.
• Failure to press the clutch pedal fully to the floor
may cause increased shift efforts, and may result in
damage to the clutch and transmission.
• Do not rest your hand on the shift lever while
driving, as this may result in transmission damage.
• Do not attempt to shift the transmission if the rear
wheels are spinning due to loss of traction. Dam-
age to the transmission may occur.
Ensure the transmission is in first gear when moving
forward from a standing position.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 221
CAUTION!
Failure to start out in first gear when moving forward
from a starting position may result in damage to the
clutch.
Shifting
Fully press the clutch pedal and lift your foot off the
accelerator pedal before shifting gears. As you release the
clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator pedal. Damage
to the transmission or clutch may occur if you do not
fully press the clutch pedal and lift off of the accelerator
pedal when shifting.
The six-speed manual transmission has a spring that
centers the shift lever near third and fourth gear. This
spring helps you know which gear you are in when you
are shifting. Be careful when shifting from first to second
or downshifting from sixth to fifth.
The spring will try to pull the shift lever toward third and
fourth gear. Make sure you move the shift lever into
second or fifth gear. If you let the shift lever move in the
direction of the pulling, you may end shifting from first
to fourth or from sixth to third gear.
You will find it easier to use only the lower gears for most
city driving. For steady highway driving with light
accelerations, sixth gear is recommended.
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, or
try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal
partially engaged. This will cause abnormal wear on the
clutch.
Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
222 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• Your vehicle is equipped with a transmission reverse
inhibitor system. When vehicle speed is greater than
3 mph (5 km/h), the reverse inhibitor activates to help
prevent shifts into REVERSE. When at a complete stop,
you may notice light shift efforts into REVERSE with
the ignition in the ON position, and increased shift
efforts into REVERSE with the ignition in the OFF
position. This is normal operation of the transmission
reverse inhibitor system.
• Shifting gears during cold weather may require an
increased effort until the transmission lubricant is
warm. This is normal and not harmful to the transmis-
sion.
• Due to the high performance nature of your drivetrain,
a certain amount of noise from the transmission is
normal. This noise can be most noticeable when the
vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL with the clutch engaged
(clutch pedal released), but it may also be heard when
driving. The noise may also be more noticeable when
the transmission is warm. This noise is normal and is
not an indication of a problem with your clutch or
transmission.
• You must always use first gear (or Reverse) when
starting from a standing position.
CAUTION!
Always make sure the vehicle comes to a complete
stop before shifting into REVERSE. Failure to do so
may result in transmission damage.
Recommended Shift Speeds
To use your manual transmission for fuel economy it
should be upshifted as listed below. Shift at the vehicle
speeds listed for acceleration. Earlier upshifts during
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 223
cruise conditions (relatively steady speeds) will result in
increased fuel economy, and may be used as indicated.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
RECOMMENDED SHIFT SPEEDS
1-4 4-5 5-6
mph 17 45 50
(km/h) (27) (72) (80)
Higher upshift speeds may be used to obtain a desired
acceleration rate.
Skip Shift Indicator Light
There are times when you must shift the trans-
mission directly from first gear into fourth gear
instead of from first gear into second gear. This
is to help you get the best possible fuel
economy from your vehicle. This occurs when engine
coolant is higher than 107°F (42°C), and vehicle speed is
greater than 16 mph (26 km/h) but less than 18 mph
(29 km/h), and engine speed is less than 1,550 RPM, and
the transmission is in first gear, and the accelerator is at
20% throttle or less. The “Skip Shift Indicator Light”
located in the tachometer will illuminate during these
times.
When the “Skip Shift Indicator Light” illuminates, the
shift mechanism will only allow shifts from first gear to
fourth gear. After you shift the transmission into fourth
gear, you can press the clutch in and shift to another
forward gear.
Downshifting - Proper downshifting will improve fuel
economy and prolong engine life.
To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, down-
shift to maintain a safe speed when descending a steep
grade.
224 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
If you skip more than one gear while downshifting
or downshift at too high a vehicle speed, you could
damage the engine, transmission, or clutch.
WARNING!
Skipping more than one gear while downshifting,
could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. You
could have a collision.
STREET/RACE MODE — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with a two mode electronic
controlled damping system. This system allows for a
compliant street suspension damping setting or a firmer
race suspension damping setting. When in street mode
the system will automatically shift the suspension damp-
ers to the firmer Race damping setting during some hard
acceleration and braking situations. There are two modes
of operation:
• Street Mode — This mode will give a sporty, but
comfortable ride. This mode is driver selectable when
the vehicle is placed in STREET mode (press the
“STREET” button on the Instrument Panel). This mode
is intended for a smoother ride on the various types of
pavement and road conditions while still providing
damping levels appropriate extreme capabilities.
• Race Mode — This mode is driver selectable when the
vehicle is placed in RACE mode (press the “RACE”
button on the Instrument Panel). This mode is for track
use only and will supply maximum grip to the tires.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 225
NOTE:
• With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the sus-
pension damping system will be in the last mode the
system was in when the vehicle was turned off. The
driver can select either Street or Race damping mode
at any time.
• The suspension mode will lock and stay in whatever
the driver selects even when the ignition is turned off
and the car restarted.
• The RACE setting will provide a much firmer ride.
• When RACE mode is enabled, a Shock symbol with
“RACE” next to it will light up in the instrument
cluster.
LAUNCH MODE
This system maximizes acceleration traction for straight
line racing.
1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop on a level track
surface with the engine running.
2. Set the steering wheel for straight ahead driving.
3. Fully depress the clutch and select the first gear
position.
4. Press and release the “LAUNCH” Button (Located on
the steering wheel controls).
226 STARTING AND OPERATING
5. Rapidly press the accelerator pedal to the floor within
one second.
NOTE: If the cluster launch DID message indicates all
conditions are correct for launch and the throttle is
pressed to the floor quickly (within approximately 1/2
second) the system will hold the engine speed to a preset
speed (below the engine rev limiter speed).
6. Release the clutch aggressively. Do not ride the clutch.
Release the accelerator pedal to deactivate launch con-
trol. Pressing the launch control button or actuating the
brakes will also deactivate launch control.
NOTE:
• Launch Mode brings the engine to optimum launch
RPM and waits for the driver to release the clutch.
Launch Mode then uses engine throttle only to achieve
controlled wheelslip for maximum acceleration
through first gear.
• Launch Mode can be used in any of the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) Modes.
LAUNCH Button
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 227
• Launch mode should not be used within the first 500
miles of engine break-in.
WARNING!
Launch Mode is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be used on any public
roadways. It is recommended that this feature be
used in a controlled environment, and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the performance pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly
have a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully
whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice,
snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
228 STARTING AND OPERATING
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if road has standing water or puddles.
CAUTION!
Driving your vehicle through deep puddles at speeds
over 5 mph (8 km/h), may cause water to be ingested
into the engine. This can cause severe engine dam-
age.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 229
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
and Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through stand-
ing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your pas-
sengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, trans-
mission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
(Continued)
230 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami-
nated, as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steer-
ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
does not in any way damage the steering system.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 231
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho-
rized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
232 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKING BRAKE
The parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure you fully apply
the parking brake and shift the transmission into
REVERSE. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to
roll and cause damage or injury.
As an added precaution when parking the vehicle, turn
the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade
and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
To apply the parking brake, grasp the handle and pull it
rearward until you feel resistance. To release the parking
brake, grasp the handle and pull it slightly while pressing
the button on the end of the handle. When the button
drops into the handle (releasing the lock), guide the
handle downward to its stop and then release the button
and the handle.
Parking Brake Lever
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 233
The “Brake System Warning Light” in the instrument
cluster will turn on when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position and the parking brake is applied.
NOTE:
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied
or a brake/ABS system fault. It does not show the
degree of brake application. If the “Brake System
Warning Light” is illuminated when the parking brake
is not applied please see your authorized dealer.
• Each time the parking brake is applied, the instrument
cluster will automatically go to the highest illumina-
tion setting regardless of the dimmer control setting.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
injured seriously or fatally. Do not leave the key
fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible
to children), and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the ve-
hicle.
• Ensure the parking brake is fully disengaged be-
fore driving. Failure to do so can lead to brake
failure, and an accident.
234 STARTING AND OPERATING
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. However, there will
be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. You may
notice increased pedal travel during application, greater
pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential
activation of the “Brake System Warning Light.”
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
Brake Pad Break-In
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a high perfor-
mance braking system. The brake pads are a semi-
metallic compound, which offer superior fade resistance
for consistent operation. A compromise to using this type
of brake pad is that the brakes may squeal slightly under
certain weather and operating conditions (.i.e., during
light brake applications).
The brakes on your new vehicle do not require a long
break-in period. However, you should avoid repeated
hard brake applications from high speeds during initial
break-in. In addition, you should avoid severe brake
loading, such as may be encountered when descending
long mountain grades.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 235
Safe Operating Tips
WARNING!
To use your brakes and accelerator more safely,
follow these tips:
• Do not “ride” the brakes by resting your foot on the
pedal. This could overheat the brakes and result in
unpredictable braking action, longer stopping dis-
tances, or brake damage.
• When descending mountains or hills, repeated
braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking
control. Avoid repeated heavy braking by down-
shifting the transmission whenever possible.
• Do not drive too fast for road conditions, especially
when roads are wet or slushy. A wedge of water can
build up between the tire tread and the road. This
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
hydroplaning action can cause loss of traction,
braking ability, and control.
• After going through deep water or a car wash,
brakes may become wet, resulting in decreased
performance and unpredictable braking action.
Dry the brakes by gentle, intermittent pedal action
while driving at very slow speeds.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), and Elec-
tronic Stability Control (ESC). All of these systems work
together to enhance vehicle stability and control in vari-
ous driving conditions.
236 STARTING AND OPERATING
Anti-Lock Brake System
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designed to aid the
driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse
braking conditions. The system operates with a separate
computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent
wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery
surfaces.
NOTE: During severe braking conditions, a pulsing sen-
sation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard. This
is normal, indicating that the ABS is functioning.
The ABS conducts a low-speed self-test at approximately
12 mph (20 km/h). If you have your foot lightly on the
brake pedal while this test is occurring, you may feel a
slight pedal movement. The movement can be more
apparent on ice and snow and be considered normal.
The ABS pump motor runs during the self-test at 12 mph
(20 km/h) and during an ABS stop. The pump motor
makes a low humming noise during operation, which is
normal.
CAUTION!
The Anti-Lock Brake System is subject to possible
detrimental effects of electronic interference caused
by improperly installed aftermarket radios or tele-
phones.
WARNING!
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) contains so-
phisticated electronic equipment that may be sus-
ceptible to interference caused by improperly in-
stalled or high output radio transmitting
equipment. This interference can cause possible
loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 237
WARNING! (Continued)
such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of
the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
collisions, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle too
closely, or hydroplaning.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• The capabilities of an Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) equipped vehicle must never be exploited in
a reckless or dangerous manner, that could jeopar-
dize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type as the original equipment and the tires must be
properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the
computer.
WARNING!
Significant over or underinflation of tires, or mixing
sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss
of braking effectiveness.
238 STARTING AND OPERATING
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn
on and stay on briefly as a bulb check when the
ignition is first turned on. If the light does not
turn on during starting, have it repaired
promptly.
This light also illuminates at vehicle start-up to indicate
that the ABS self-check is in process. If the light remains
on after start-up, or turns on and remains on at road
speeds, it may indicate a system malfunction or that the
system is inoperative. In this case, the system reverts to
standard non-anti-lock brakes. If this occurs, safely bring
the vehicle to a complete stop as soon as possible and
cycle the ignition to attempt to reset the ABS. If the light
remains on, see your authorized dealer immediately to
have the system serviced. Also, if the “BRAKE Warning
Light” and the “ABS Warning Light” are on, and the
parking brake is fully released, see your authorized
dealer immediately.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The TCS system monitors the amount of wheel spin of
each driven wheel. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability.
Electronic Stability Control
In full on mode the TCS system enhances directional
control and stability of the vehicle under various driving
conditions. The ESC corrects for oversteering and under-
steering the vehicle by applying the brake of the appro-
priate wheel. Engine power may also be reduced to assist
in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer
and help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 239
In full on mode ESC utilizes sensors in the vehicle to
determine the path that the driver intends to steer the
vehicle and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the intended path,
the ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to
assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or
understeer.
• Oversteer – when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer – when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Control System (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on
the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
all accidents, including those resulting from exces-
sive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces,
or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappro-
priate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
of others.
240 STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Operating
Modes
The ESC system may have five available operating
modes:
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC system.
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in
this mode. The ESC On mode should be used for most
driving situations. The ESC should only be turned OFF
for specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
ESC Full Off
The ESC Off mode is intended for off-highway or off-
road use only and should not be used on any public
roadways. In this mode, all TCS and ESC stability fea-
tures are turned OFF. To enter the “Full Off” mode, press
and hold the “ESC Off” switch for five seconds while the
vehicle is stopped with the engine running. After five
seconds, a chime will sound, the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the
ESC Button
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 241
⬙ESC OFF⬙ message will display in the vehicle cluster (left
of the odometer). The “ESC OFF” message may appear in
the Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to “Driver
Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information. To turn ESC
ON again, momentarily press the “ESC Off” switch.
WARNING!
With the ESC switched OFF, the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emer-
gency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not
engage to assist in maintaining stability. The “Full
Off” ESC mode is intended for off-highway or off-
road only.
Sport Mode — If Equipped
Sport mode has reduced traction control and reduced
stability control. To enter the “Sport Mode” mode, press
the “ESC” switch once (located on the steering wheel).
The “ESC Sport Light” will illuminate, and the ⬙ESC
SPORT⬙ message will display in the vehicle cluster (left of
the odometer). Refer to “Driver Information Display
(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Track Mode — If Equipped
Track Mode has no traction control and has reduced
stability control. To enter the “Track Mode” mode, press
the “ESC” switch twice. The “ESC Track Light” will
illuminate, and the ⬙ESC TRACK⬙ message will display in
the vehicle cluster (left of the odometer). Refer to “Driver
Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
Rain Mode
Rain mode offers increased traction control and stability
control for low traction conditions such as wet roads, dry
242 STARTING AND OPERATING
roads during cold temperatures, or when the driver
wants enhanced stability due to lack of familiarity or
experience with the vehicle’s response. To enter the “Rain
Mode” mode, press the “ESC” switch three times. The
“ESC Rain Light” will illuminate, and the ⬙ESC RAIN⬙
message will display in the vehicle cluster (left of the
odometer). Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
NOTE: Some models may not offer “Sport” or “Track”
Mode.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 243
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com-
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
244 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 245
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
•
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
•
LL = Light load tire or
•
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure
– Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
246 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 247
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
248 STARTING AND OPERATING
Term Definition
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehi-
cle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 249
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
250 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
Tire And Loading Information Placard
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 251
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
650 lbs [295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow-
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num-
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
252 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 253
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re-
sult in overheating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or under-inflated tires can affect ve-
hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
254 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor-
mal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the
need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 255
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are under-
inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.
The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side-
wall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
256 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat-
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 257
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater thana¼ofaninch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme-
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring,
summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary be-
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
258 STARTING AND OPERATING
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold
driving conditions. Install winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more informa-
tion, contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury
or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates
the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the origi-
nal equipment tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 259
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi-
ately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor-
mation.
260 STARTING AND OPERATING
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in
“What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 261
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
262 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. In-
stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-
ously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 263
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (2 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
•
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire
tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread
life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main-
tenance schedule is highly recommended.
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
264 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread
Wear Indicator.” Refer to the Tire and Loading Information
placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size
designation of your tire. The Load Index and Speed
Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equip-
ment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example
found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual
for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed
Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 265
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Due to limited clearance, tire chains or traction devices
are not recommended.
CAUTION!
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are used.
266 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance interval. Remember, more frequent rotation
is permissible if desired. Also, correct for anything caus-
ing rapid or unusual wear prior to performing the tire
rotation.
NOTE: Each wheel on your vehicle contains a tire pres-
sure sensor. The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
learns the location of each sensor though system pro-
gramming. Although not required, the manufacturer
recommends reprogramming the TPMS after rotating the
tires so that the system can relearn each sensor’s location.
See your authorized dealer for system reprogramming.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 267
The front and rear tires are different sizes and cannot be
used in place of each other. Rotate the tires “side-to-side”
as shown in the diagram.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module. It is particularly impor-
tant for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on
your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pres-
sure. The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module
• Four TPM sensors
• Various TPMS messages, which display in the Driver
Information Display (DID)
• TPM Telltale Light
Tire Rotation
268 STARTING AND OPERATING
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (7.0 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based
on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this increased pres-
sure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warn-
ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illu-
minates, you must increase the tire pressure to the
recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM
Telltale Light to turn off. The system will automatically
update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this informa-
tion.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 269
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to urn ON the TPM
Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the
TPM Telltale Light will still be ON. In this situation, the
TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pres-
sure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
eration or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-
market tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to your local dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the TPM sensor.
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module. It is particularly impor-
tant for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on
your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pres-
sure. The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module
• Four TPM sensors
• Various TPMS messages which display in the Driver
Information Display (DID)
• TPM Telltale Light
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 271
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road
tires. In addition, the Driver Information Display (DID)
will display a ⬙LOW TIRE⬙ message and a graphic
showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire
pressure values changing color. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ mes-
sage will also be displayed.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition (those
in a different color in the DID graphic) to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure inflation value as
shown in the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the system
receives the updated tire pressures, the system will
automatically update, the graphic display in the DID will
change color back to the original color, and the TPM
Telltale Light will turn off. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
Service TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the TPM Telltale Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the
Driver Information Display (DID) will display a ⬙SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to
indicate which sensor is not being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the TPM Telltale Light will no longer
flash, and the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no
longer display, and a pressure value will display in place
of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the
following:
272 STARTING AND OPERATING
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the TPM sensors.
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
materials that may block radio wave signals.
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
The DID will also display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is
detected. In this case, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message is then followed with a graphic display with
pressure values still shown. This indicates that the pres-
sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors
but they may not be located in the correct vehicle
position. The system still needs to be serviced as long as
the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message is displayed.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow-
ing licenses:
United States MRXMERCTX1
Canada 2546A-MERCTX1
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 273
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
8.4L Engine
The 8.4L engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide excel-
lent fuel economy and performance when
using high-quality premium unleaded
gasoline with an octane rating of 91 or
higher.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of “premium” gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 automobile manufacturers around the world
have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifica-
tions (the World Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which
define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced
emissions, engine performance, and durability for your
vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gaso-
lines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are
available.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasoline contain oxygenates and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop-
erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide im-
proved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso-
line containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and drivability prob-
lems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illumi-
nate. Please observe pump labels as they should
clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than
10% ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% ethanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso-
line containing up to 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Lim-
ited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 275
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
E-85 perform the following:
• Drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer).
• Change the engine oil and oil filter.
• Disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
engine controller memory.
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E-85 fuel.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine per-
formance and damage the emissions control sys-
tem.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser-
vice. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 277
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
• Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to
prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex-
haust gases from entering the vehicle.
ADDING FUEL
1. Press the fuel filler door release switch (located in the
driver’s door map pocket).
2. Open the fuel filler door.
NOTE: In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the
fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the
fuel door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel
door using the inside release button. Do not pry on the
door.
278 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the
pipe seals the system.
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe – the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refuel-
ing.
NOTE: Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches
allowing the flapper door to open.
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
6. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
NOTE: A funnel is provided (located in the trunk in the
spare tire area) to open the flapper door to allow for
emergency refueling with a gas can.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tions and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator
Light” to turn on.
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 279
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel
filler door emergency release procedure by following the
proceeding steps.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Locate the carpet access door (on the right side inner
trim panel of the trunk).
3. Pull the edge of the access door on the right side inner
trim panel to expose the emergency release cable.
Carpet Access Door
280 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. Pull the release cable to release the fuel door.
Edge Of Access Door Release Cable
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 281
5. Return the release cable to the original position (inside
the inner trim panel) and push the carpet back into the
original position.
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.
Fuel Door Open Carpet Into Original Position
282 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground)
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Manual Transmission
Flat Tow None NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow Front NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT RECOMMENDED
On Trailer All OK
NOTE: If the vehicle requires towing, make sure all four
wheels are off the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-
age from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 283
GROUND CLEARANCE
The front and rear fascias and side sills ride low and
ground clearance is limited.
CAUTION!
Damage to the front and rear fascias and side sills can
occur if you disregard the low ground clearance in
these areas of your vehicle. Pay close attention when
parking to avoid running into parking curbs. Exer-
cise caution when entering or exiting steep drive-
ways, or when pulling off the road onto soft shoul-
ders.
284 STARTING AND OPERATING
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHER ...........286
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ............286
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS ......................287
▫ Torque Specifications ...................288
䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED .........289
▫ Tire Service Kit Storage .................290
▫ Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . .290
▫ Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions..........291
▫ Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit .........294
䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES ...........299
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .............303
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ...........304
6
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the
center of the instrument panel above the climate controls.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc-
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flasher.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flasher
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-
tion.
• On the highways — Slow down and use the highest
gear possible.
• In city traffic — While stopped, put the transmission
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
• In city traffic — While moving, shift into the highest
gear possible to reduce engine RPM.
286 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 287
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/
Bolt Socket
Size
107 Ft-Lbs (145 N·m) 1/2” x 20 19 mm
**Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
Wheel Mounting Surface
288 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to ¼” (6 mm) in the tire tread can be
sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws
or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service
Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approxi-
mately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you
to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).
Torque Patterns
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 289
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is located in the left side of the trunk.
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation
Tire Service Kit Location
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Sealant Bottle 5 — Mode Select Knob
2 — Deflation Button 6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
3 — Pressure Gauge 7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
4 — Power Button 8 — Power Plug (located on the bot-
tom side of the Tire Service Kit)
290 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this
position for air pump operation only. Use the
Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this
position to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant and
to inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose) (6)
when selecting this mode.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (4) once to
turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and release the Power
Button (4) again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and
Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at
the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to
assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to
“Sealing a Tire with Tire Service Kit” section (F)
“Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 291
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one
tire application use and need to be replaced after each
use. Always replace these components immediately at
your original equipment vehicle dealer.
• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,
clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once
the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and
properly discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire
Service Kit.
• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts,
or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air
Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob
(5) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to
avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit
Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than ¼”
(6 mm) diameter in the tread of your vehicle.
• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
292 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the Tire Service Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4” (6 mm) or larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or
heat source.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants
of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in
the place provided. Failure to follow these warn-
ings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to
you, your passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service
Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.
Tire Service Kit is harmful if inhaled, swallowed,
or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye,
and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with
plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or
skin. Change clothing as soon as possible, if there
is any contact with clothing.
(Continued)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 293
WARNING! (Continued)
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a phy-
sician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of
reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth imme-
diately with plenty of water and drink plenty of
water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician
immediately.
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to
reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat
on the ground. This will provide the best positioning
of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated
tire and running the air pump. Move the vehicle as
necessary to place the valve stem in this position
before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or
in Gear (manual transmission) and place the ignition
in the OFF position.
4. Set the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the
Sealant Mode position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
294 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the
valve stem.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The
Deflated Tire:
• Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire
Service Kit.
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the
parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL.
• After pushing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within0–10
seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn Off the Tire Service
Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve
stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris.
Reconnect the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem.
Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant
Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the Power
Button (4) to turn On the Tire Service Kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if
available. Make sure the engine is running before
turning ON the Tire Service Kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 295
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and
the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air
Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose (6):
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no
longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70
seconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant
Hose (6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as
70 psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease
quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the
actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) is
empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi-
ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
pressure within 15 minutes:
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service
Kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instru-
ment panel.
296 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle
storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Ve-
hicle.”
CAUTION!
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant con-
tacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s inte-
rior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal
Tire Service Kit components which may cause
permanent damage to the kit.
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after
using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph
(90 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure
to follow this warning can result in injuries that are
serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others
around you.
(E) After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop
to Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 297
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air
Mode position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
3.
Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and screw
the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge (3).
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit
and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire
and loading information label on the driver-side door
opening.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from
12 Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in
the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument
panel after the tire has been repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as pos-
sible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replace-
ment”.
298 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the Tire Service Kit.
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose
of it accordingly.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit
housing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so
that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in
the front of the housing. Push the bottle into the
housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the
bottle is locked into place.
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its
storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the
vehicle.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be hurt by the fan.
(Continued)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 299
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic
converter and once the engine has started, ignite
and damage the converter and vehicle. If the ve-
hicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may
be used to obtain a start from another vehicle. This
type of start can be dangerous if done improperly,
so follow this procedure carefully.
• Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry
such as watch bands or bracelets that might make
an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be
seriously injured.
NOTE: The battery is located underneath an access
panel inside the rear compartment on the left side of the
vehicle. A remote battery terminal is located in the engine
compartment for jump-starting.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry
such as watchbands or bracelets that might make an
inadvertent electrical contact.
Battery Location
300 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. When boost is provided by a battery in another
vehicle, park that vehicle within booster cable reach,
but without allowing the vehicles to touch one an-
other.
3. Set the parking brake, place the transmission in NEU-
TRAL, and turn the ignition OFF on both vehicles.
4. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal loads.
5. Remove the plastic fuse cover to gain access to the
remote jump-start positive (+) post in the engine
compartment. Refer to the following illustration for
remote jump-starting connections.
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
Remote Jump Start Connections
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 301
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
6. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
7. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
8. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
9. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electri-
cal spark could cause the battery to explode and
could result in personal injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
10. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
302 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
11. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the remote positive (+) post of the vehicle
with the discharged battery.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between 1st gear
and REVERSE, while gently pushing the accelerator. Use
the least amount of pressure to maintain the rocking
motion, without spinning the wheels, or racing the
engine.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 303
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting be-
tween 1st gear and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no trans-
mission shifting occurring).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck. And do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Only use flatbed
equipment. Always comply with applicable state or local
towing ordinances.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-
age from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
304 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 8.4L ..........307
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II) . . .308
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS .............308
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS ..................310
䡵 DEALER SERVICE ......................310
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ...........311
▫ Engine Oil ..........................312
▫ Engine Oil Filter ......................313
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter ................314
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery ...............315
▫ Hibernation Mode ....................316
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance .............317
▫ Body Lubrication .....................319
▫ Wiper Blades ........................319
▫ Adding Washer Fluid ..................320
▫ Exhaust System ......................320
▫ Cooling System ......................323
▫ Brake System ........................329
▫ Manual Transmission ..................331
7
▫ Hydraulic Clutch .....................332
▫ Rear Axle ...........................332
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion ...........................333
䡵 FUSES ..............................340
▫ Power Distribution Center ...............341
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE ....................348
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS .................351
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT ..................353
▫ Front Headlamp, Front Park/Turn Signal
Lamp ..............................353
▫ Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp ............353
▫ Taillamp, Tail/Stop Lamp ................353
▫ Rear Turn Signal Lamp .................353
▫ Backup Lamps........................353
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES ....................354
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE
PARTS ..............................355
▫ Engine .............................355
▫ Chassis ............................357
306 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 8.4L
1 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 6 — Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir
2 — Coolant Pressure Cap 7 — Engine Oil Fill
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
4 — Power Distribution Center 9 — Air Cleaner Filter
5 — Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 307
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
To meet new government regulations and promote
cleaner air, your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This system
monitors the performance of the emissions and engine
control systems. When these systems are operating prop-
erly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and
fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within
current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light. It will also
store diagnostic codes and other information to assist
your service technician in making repairs. Although your
vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see
your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the light on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any state emissions
tests can be performed.
If the light is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
308 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the
following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
position or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed
to the I/M station.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 309
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for mainte-
nance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
310 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter-
vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo-
nents as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, power steering or air conditioning.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of
component malfunction, use only the specified
fluid for the flushing procedure.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 311
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the oil level is approximately five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil level
before starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will
give you an incorrect reading.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground also
will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Add
oil only when the level is below the SAFE mark.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or six months,
whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12633.
The manufacturer recommends the use of a full synthetic
0W-40 or equivalent engine oil.
312 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)
SAE 0W-40 engine oil such as MOPAR® or Pennzoil
Ultra® is preferred for use in all operating temperatures.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-
ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-
tives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 313
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom-
mended.
CAUTION!
Some aftermarket air cleaners and filters can cause
mass air flow sensor issues which can lead to a
driveability problem or a limp home condition.
314 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintenance-Free Battery
The top of the maintenance-free battery is vented, and
must be replaced with a vented battery.
The battery is located underneath an access panel inside
the rear compartment on the left side of the vehicle. A
remote battery terminal is located in the engine compart-
ment for jump-starting. Refer to “Jump-Starting Proce-
dures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further
information.
To gain access to the battery, remove the floor portion of
the rear compartment carpet.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
(Continued)
Battery Location
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 315
WARNING! (Continued)
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-
fore connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Hibernation Mode
The Hibernation mode feature conserves battery power
when storing the vehicle. It allows for up to three months
of storage time without losing radio and engine control-
ler adaptive memory. Using this feature is an alternative
to disconnecting the battery.
316 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: This vehicle is designed to sit in storage with a
fully charged battery for up to 30 days. If you plan to
store the vehicle longer than 30 days, we recommend
doing one of the following:
• Disconnect the battery.
• Use the battery charger.
• Put the vehicle into Hibernation mode (3-month
charge).
To Activate Hibernation Mode
1. Cycle the ignition switch to (ACC).
2. Select Hibernation mode within the Driver Informa-
tion Display (DID).
3. Press the right arrow button on the steering wheel
controls for one second. Vehicle will countdown from
ten seconds and enter Hibernation Mode.
NOTE: You may press the right arrow button on the
steering wheel controls during the countdown to abort
Hibernation Mode.
To Deactivate Hibernation Mode
1. Press the RKE UNLOCK button to unlock the vehicle.
2. Press the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 317
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
318 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mecha-
nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR®
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield and rear window periodically with a sponge
or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will
remove accumulations of salt, waxes, or road film, and
help reduce streaking and smearing.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield or rear window.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield or rear window. Make sure that they are
not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid
damaging the blade. Keep the wiper blade out of contact
with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 319
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor-
mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
front of the engine compartment on the passenger side of
the vehicle. Be sure to check the fluid level in the
reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent (not engine coolant (anti-
freeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to flush
out the residual water.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
320 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-
hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con-
tact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of un-
leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine perfor-
mance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 321
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-
age:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
322 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead or cycle the ignition
switch to the LOCK position. The fan is tempera-
ture controlled and can start at any time the igni-
tion switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C
condenser/radiator for any accumulation of bugs, leaves,
etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden
hose vertically down the face of the condenser/radiator.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the
bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti-
freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 323
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to
MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an au-
thorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
(Continued)
324 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
tifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that al-
lows extended maintenance intervals. This engine cool-
ant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reduc-
ing this extended maintenance period, it is important that
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conform-
ing to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan-
dard MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler
Material Standard MS.90032.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan-
dard MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concen-
trations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
−34° F (−37° C) are anticipated.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 325
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE:
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to insure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes
pressure to build up in the cooling system. To
prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
(Continued)
326 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up
any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze
point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS.90032
should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 327
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti-
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
expansion bottle must also be protected against freez-
ing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion
protection of your engine which contains aluminum
components.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
328 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emis-
sions.
Brake System
To ensure brake system performance, all brake system
components should be inspected periodically. Refer to
“Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance
intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Master Cylinder – Brake Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately
if the brake system warning light indicates system fail-
ure.
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per-
forming underhood services.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up
to the requirements described on the brake fluid reser-
voir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the
brake pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused
by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 329
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. Use
of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial boiling
point or unidentified as to specification, may result in
sudden brake failure during hard prolonged braking.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro-
longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a accident.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
330 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in an accident.
Change Brake Fluid
Brake fluid will tend to absorb moisture from the atmo-
sphere over time. If the fluid becomes contaminated with
water, brake performance will deteriorate. Therefore, the
brake fluid must be changed at the intervals specified in
the “Maintenance Schedule.” Refer to “Maintenance
Schedule” for further information. See your authorized
dealer for service.
Manual Transmission
Transmission Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid in the transmission when performing
other underbody services.
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug located on
the left side of the transmission. The fluid level should be
approximately 1/4 in (6.4 mm) below the bottom of the
fill hole. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper
level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
NOTE: DO NOT overfill transmission, damage can
occur.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 331
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or damage to the
transmission. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and
Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifica-
tions.
Change Transmission Fluid
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals. If contaminated with water, change the
fluid immediately. See your authorized dealer for service.
Hydraulic Clutch
Master Cylinder – Clutch Fluid Level Check
The clutch hydraulic system is fed by a segregated
volume of fluid within the brake system master cylinder
reservoir. In the event of leakage or wear, use only the
manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Flu-
ids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Rear Axle
Axle Lubricant Level Check
Check the exterior of the axle for evidence of gear oil
leakage every 12 months or 6,000 miles (10 000 km). This
check should be made with the vehicle level and on the
ground or raised on an axle and wheel type hoist. The
axle lubricant level should be between the bottom of the
filler plug and a point approximately 3/8 inch (9.5 mm)
below the filler plug. If adding axle lubricant, use only
the manufacturer’s recommended axle lubricant. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information.
332 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Using axle fluid other than the manufactured recom-
mended fluid may cause a shudder/noise issue. refer
to “Fluids Lubes and Genuine Parts” in “ Maintain-
ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
Change Axle Lubricant
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals. Change the lubricant immediately if
contaminated with water. See your authorized dealer for
service.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed
on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are
highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami-
nants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated,
extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi-
tions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 333
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same
soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chlo-
ride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or
control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and
mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from corroding
and tarnishing.
NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong
acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the wheel
surface.
334 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh
brushes. These products and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including exces-
sive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire
and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent
damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor
or Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently
damage this finish and such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing
so. Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes when
stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corrosion.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 335
Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black
Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will perma-
nently damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE
ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
Interior Care
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
MOPAR® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR® Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
336 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
Leather or Vinyl Seat/Trim Care and Cleaning
Leather is best preserved by regular cleaning with a
damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an
abrasive and damage the leather surface and should be
removed immediately with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils
can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR®
Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking the leather with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean the leather. Application
of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the
original condition.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with electric defrosters or windows
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 337
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.).
Aero Group (Front Splitter) — If Equipped
The front splitter will not flex or compress against
impacts from the front. If an impact does occur, have the
splitter inspected. A cracked or delaminated splitter
should be replaced.
338 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Always leave ample room and be sure to educate anyone
you allow to operate the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Use care when approaching parking blocks, tall
speed bumps and garage curbs. These surfaces can
damage your splitter.
Use caution when driving up to sloped surfaces or over
speed bumps. Approaching a speed bump or a slope at a
slight angle may improve your clearance.
CAUTION!
• Hard contact with steep ramps may cause damage
to your splitter.
• Replace rub strips when they are worn down to 1/8
inch (3 mm) on the front edge. This will avoid
damage to the carbon fiber panel.
Front Splitter
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 339
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an ap-
propriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other
material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property dam-
age.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
340 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Distribution Center
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle. This
center contains fuses and relays.
Cavity Relay Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
3 — 40 Amp Green — Rad Fan
4 — 40 Amp Green — Rad Fan Rly High
5 — 40 Amp Green — ABS/ESP Pump Feed
6 — 40 Amp Green — Starter
Power Distribution Center
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 341
Cavity Relay Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
7 — 40 Amp Green — CBC (Ext. Lighting #1)
8 — 40 Amp Green — CBC (Ext. Lighting #2)
9 — 30 Amp Pink — Washer Pump
10 — 30 Amp Pink — CBC (Power Lock)
11 — Jumper Black — B+ Jumper
12 — 25 Amp Clear — ABS/ESP Valve Feed
13 — — 20 Amp Yellow Horn
14 — — 10 Amp Red A/C Clutch
15 — — 10 Amp Red Diagnostic, Fuel Door, Stop Switch
16 — — 15 Amp Blue KIN, RF Hub
17 — — 25 Amp circuit
breaker
Power Seats
18 — 30 Amp Pink — Driver Door Mod
19 — 30 Amp Pink — Passenger Door Mod
20 — 30 Amp Pink — Rear Window Defroster
342 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Relay Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
21 — 20 Amp Blue — Wiper
22 — — — B+ Jumper
23 — — 15 Amp Blue HVAC MOD, Cluster, ICS-Switch Bank
24 — — 25 Amp Clear PCM-Powertrain Control Module
25 — — 25 Amp Clear Fuel Pump
26 — — 20 Amp Yellow ASD #1
27 — — 20 Amp Yellow ASD #2
28 — — — Spare
29 — 40 Amp Green — HVAC Blower
30 — 20 Amp Yellow — RR Power Outlet, Adj. Pedals, UCI
31 — — — B+ Jumper
32 — Jumper Black — B+ Jumper
33 — 20 Amp Yellow — Run Acc relay
34 — — — B+ Jumper
35 — — — Spare
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 343
Cavity Relay Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
36 — — 10 Amp Red ORC Mod Run
37 — — 15 Amp Blue Cluster, Camera
38 — — 20 Amp Yellow Active Damping Suspension
39 — — 10 Amp Red HVAC Module, In Car Temp, Blower Relay
40 — — — Spare
41 G8VA — — Run/Start
42 G8VA — — Fuel Door
43AC
(Forward
Fuse)
— — 2 Amp Grey SCCM
43BE
(Rear-
ward
Fuse)
— — 10 Amp Red Corax
44AC
(Forward
— — 10 Amp Red Rear View Mirror, Aux Port Jumper.
344 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Relay Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
Fuse)
44BE
(Rear-
ward
Fuse)
— — 10 Amp Red IBS
45 — — 10 Amp Red PCM-Powertrain Control Module, Fuel Pump
Relay.
46 — — 10 Amp Red ESC Module, Stop Lamp Switch
47 — — 10 Amp Red ORC Module, Passenger Seat OCM
48 — — 10 Amp Red SCCM
49 — — 25 Amp Clear Amplifier
50 HC Mi-
cro
— — Rad Fan
51 HC Mi-
cro
— — Rad Fan Relay SER/PAR
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 345
Cavity Relay Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
52 HC Mi-
cro
— — Starter Relay
53 HC Mi-
cro
— — Rear Window Defroster Relay
54 HC Re-
lay
— — Rad Fan Relay High
55 HC Mi-
cro
— — Wiper ON/OFF
56 HC Mi-
cro
— — Wiper LO/HI
57 G8VA — — Horn Relay
58 G8VA — — A/C Clutch Relay
59 HC Mi-
cro
— — HVAC Blower
60 HC Mi-
cro
— — Fuel Pump
346 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Relay Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
61 G8VA — — Run Relay #1
62 G8VA — — Run Relay #2
63 HC Mi-
cro
— — ASD #1
64 HC Mi-
cro
— — ASD #2
65 G8VA — — Run Accy #1, Pop Up, Driver Door Window
Switch
NOTE: A 15 Amp fuse for the radio system is located
in-line at the battery positive terminal.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 347
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
VEHICLE STORAGE
We recommend that you follow these guidelines for
storing your vehicle for extended periods.
• Fill the fuel tank. This will prevent water condensation
inside the tank. If you plan to store your vehicle more
than two months, add an anti-oxidant fuel stabilizer to
the fuel tank.
• Change the oil to remove any corrosive combustion
related acids in the crankcase.
• Check that the radiator coolant level of protection is to
at least -20°F (-29°C).
• Make sure that all tires are inflated to the optimum
pressure.
• Wash and wax the vehicle to protect the finish.
• Store the vehicle in a dry, well-ventilated location.
• Move the wiper blades away from the windshield.
348 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Block the wheels. Do not apply the parking brake.
• Cut blocks of plywood about the same size of the tires.
Cover each block with indoor/outdoor carpeting and
place them between the tires and concrete. This will
prevent tire flat spotting.
• For long-term storage, remove the tires and put the
vehicle up on blocks. Stack the tires on plywood and
cover with a tarp to prevent flat spotting.
• If the vehicle will be subjected to freezing tempera-
tures, either remove the battery and store it in a dry,
well ventilated area or connect a trickle charger
(1.5 Amp) with automatic shutdown / overcharge
protection to the battery. However, do not leave the
trickle charger hooked up to the battery without being
plugged in to a 110 Volt AC outlet, as this will result in
further drain on the vehicle’s battery. If the vehicle is
not going to be driven in the next three weeks, perform
the battery recharge procedure in the Service Manual.
Then, either disconnect the battery at the negative
terminal or use the “Battery Save Feature” to conserve
battery power. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures/
Battery Save Feature” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”
for further information.
• Cover the vehicle whenever possible to prevent acci-
dental damage to the finish.
NOTE: Disconnecting the battery causes the engine con-
trol system to lose memory of some “learned” functions.
After reconnecting the battery, the engine may run rough
until the control module “relearns” these functions. Us-
ing the Battery Save Feature will prevent the engine
controller from loosing its memory.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 349
CAUTION!
Use care when disconnecting the remote positive
cable. It is connected to the battery and can short out
to any metal on the vehicle. Always tape or wrap the
exposed cable end to prevent electrical shorts.
Check the battery every four to six weeks to ensure that
the voltage is above 12.10 Volts. The voltage will drop
more rapidly in hot temperatures. If battery voltage
drops below 12.10 Volts, follow the battery recharge
procedure in the Service Manual.
NOTE: To help prevent the battery from discharging
during shorter periods of inactivity, perform the follow-
ing:
1. Make sure that the liftgate, hood, doors, windows are
completely closed.
2. Make sure that Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit-
ter is operating and that the battery is good.
3. Make sure that the HOOD, LIFTGATE, and DOOR
switches are in adjustment. Perform the quick system
check, which follows:
Use the remote transmitter to set the alarm. If the alarm
SET light comes on and flashes, the system is operating
properly. If not, there is a problem with a switch or the
system. See your authorized dealer for service.
If you plan to store the vehicle longer than 30 days, we
recommend using Hibernation Mode to conserve bat-
tery power. Refer to “Hibernation Mode” in Mainte-
nance Procedures for further information.
350 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Message Center Indicators 103
Cluster LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Gauge Pack 103
Heater Control 37
Interior Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Courtesy Foot Well Lights LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Cargo Lamp (Coupe Liftgate) 168
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 351
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Low/High Beam Headlamp HID (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Front Side Marker Lamp 2821M
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Tail/Stop/Turn Signal Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Rear Marker Lamp 2821M
Backup Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
License Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
Front Headlamp, Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp
For bulb replacement, see your authorized dealer.
Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp
For bulb replacement, see your authorized dealer.
Taillamp, Tail/Stop Lamp
For bulb replacement, see your authorized dealer.
Rear Turn Signal Lamp
For bulb replacement, see your authorized dealer.
Backup Lamps
For bulb replacement, see your authorized dealer.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 353
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate) 16 Gallons 60.6 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
We recommend you use synthetic SAE 0W-40, API Certified. 11 Quarts 10.4 Liters
Transmission
We recommend you use MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission
Fluid.
3.4 Quarts 3.2 Liters
Rear Axle
We recommend you use Castrol SAF-XJ/SAE 75W-140 Synthetic
Gear and Axle Lubricant.
1.5 Quarts 1.4 Liters
Cooling System *
We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant (OAT
coolant conforming to MS.90032) 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or
equivalent).
16 Quarts 15 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT coolant conforming
to MS.90032.
Engine Oil We recommend you use a full synthetic 0W-40 engine oil
such as MOPAR® or Pennzoil Ultra or equivalent
engine oil.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use MOPAR® Engine Oil Filters.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs, see
your authorized dealer.
Fuel Selection We recommend you use Unleaded 91 Octane Only or
Higher.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an au-
thorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
tifreeze) is not recommended.
356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Transmission We recommend you use MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Rear Axle We recommend you use Castrol SAF-XJ/SAE 75W-140
Synthetic Gear and Axle Lubricant.
Brake/Clutch Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR® Brake and Clutch
Fluid DOT 4 Motor Vehicle.
Power Steering Reservoir We recommend you use MOPAR® Power Steering Fluid
+ 4, MOPAR® or ATF+4® Automatic Transmission
Fluid.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this
manual must be done at the times or mileages specified
to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-
tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving. Inspection and service should also be done
anytime a malfunction is suspected.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change in-
tervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months,
whichever comes first.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
At Each Stop For Fuel
• Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level
while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when
the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
Once A Month
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
even if it occurs before your next scheduled service.
• Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
360 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, power steering, and transmission, and
add as needed.
• Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct
operation.
At Each Oil Change
• Change the engine oil filter.
• Inspect the exhaust system.
NOTE: Also, inspect the exhaust system if you notice a
change in the sound of the exhaust system, or if the
exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle.
• Inspect the brake hoses.
• Inspect the suspension components.
• Lubricate door hinges and check springs.
• Check the engine coolant level, hoses, and clamps.
• Check power steering fluid level.
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 361
MAINTENANCE CHART
Miles:
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000
108,000
114,000
120,000
126,000
132,000
138,000
144,000
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilometers:
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
Change the engine oil and
engine oil filter.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Rotate the tires, rotate at the
first sign of irregular wear, even
if it occurs before scheduled
maintenance.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Inspect the brake linings; re-
place if necessary.
XXXXXXXXXXXX
Inspect the exhaust system. XXXXXXXXXXXX
Change Brake Fluid XXXXXX
Adjust the parking brake on
vehicles equipped with four
wheel disc brakes.
XXXXX
362 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Miles:
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000
108,000
114,000
120,000
126,000
132,000
138,000
144,000
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilometers:
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
Change the engine oil and
engine oil filter.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Change the manual transmis-
sion fluid.
XXXX
Inspect the manual transmis-
sion fluid, add as necessary.
XX XX XX XX
Change the rear axle fluid. XXXXXXXX
Inspect front suspension, tie
rod ends, and boot seals, for
cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper loose-
ness or end play; replace if
necessary.
XXXXXXXXXXXX
Replace the engine air cleaner. XXXXX
Replace the air conditioning
filter.
XXXXXXXXXXXX
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 363
Miles:
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000
108,000
114,000
120,000
126,000
132,000
138,000
144,000
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilometers:
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
Change the engine oil and
engine oil filter.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Inspect and replace the PCV
Valve if necessary
X
Replace the spark plugs ** X
Flush and replace the engine
coolant at 120 months if not
done at 150,000 miles
(240,000 km).
XX
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
monthly intervals do not apply.
364 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve-
hicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 365
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE ...................368
▫ Prepare For The Appointment.............368
▫ Prepare A List ........................368
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests .............368
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ..............368
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center ............369
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center .........369
▫ In Mexico Contact .....................370
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)...................370
▫ Service Contract ......................370
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION .............371
䡵 MOPAR®PARTS.......................372
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ............372
▫
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .372
▫ In Canada...........................372
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ............373
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES ........374
▫ Treadwear...........................374
▫ Traction Grades .......................374
▫ Temperature Grades....................375
9
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
368 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con-
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (855) SRT–TEAM
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 369
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call
(800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
370 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of compo-
nent wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC
warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 371
MOPAR® PARTS
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424- 9153),
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-
trator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
372 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
mation that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward lan-
guage with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshoot-
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac-
quaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included
are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance pro-
cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety
tips.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 373
Call toll free at:
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
374 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 375
INDEX
10
About Your Brakes ........................235
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) ................237
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............325
Adding Fuel .............................278
Adding Washer Fluid ......................320
Additives, Fuel ...........................276
Adjustable Pedals .........................110
AirBag...............................44, 45
Advance Front Air Bag .................45, 46
Air Bag Components .....................44
Air Bag Operation .......................48
Air Bag Warning Light ....................66
Enhanced Accident Response ................65
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .................68
FrontAirBag ........................44, 45
If A Deployment Occurs ...................64
Knee Impact Bolsters .....................61
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ............67
Transporting Pets ........................80
Air Bag Deployment ........................44
Air Bag Light .......................66, 83, 142
Air Bag Maintenance .......................67
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .314
Air Conditioner Maintenance .................317
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ..............200
Air Conditioning Refrigerant ..............317, 318
Air Conditioning System ....................317
Air Pressure, Tires.........................256
Alarm Light .............................146
Alarm System (Security Alarm) ................17
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ...............7
Antenna................................192
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)...............324, 354
Capacities ............................354
Disposal ..............................327
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................237
Anti-Lock Warning Light.................153, 239
Appearance Care .........................333
378 INDEX
Auto Down Power Windows ..................29
Automatic Door Locks ......................27
Automatic Headlights ......................100
Auto Unlock, Doors ........................27
Auto Up Power Windows ....................29
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ........127
Auxiliary Power Outlet .....................127
Battery.................................315
Emergency Starting ......................299
Jump Starting ..........................299
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) ........22
Location ..............................315
Remote Battery Replacement ................22
Saving Feature (Protection) ................316
Storing Vehicle .........................316
Transmitter Battery Replacement .............22
Belts, Seat .............................32, 82
Body Mechanism Lubrication .................319
B-Pillar Location ..........................250
Brake Control System, Electronic ..............236
Brake, Parking ...........................233
Brake System .........................235, 329
Anti-Lock (ABS) .....................235, 237
Fluid Check ........................329, 357
Master Cylinder ........................329
Warning Light .........................144
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle ......80, 235
Brightness, Interior Lights ...................104
Bulb Replacement .........................353
Bulbs, Light...........................84, 351
Camera, Rear ............................116
Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ..........354
Capacities, Fluid ..........................354
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) ...........................313
Power Steering .........................232
10
INDEX 379
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ................326
Carbon Monoxide Warning ................81, 278
Car Washes .............................333
Cellular Phone ...........................192
Chains, Tire .............................266
Chart, Tire Sizing .........................245
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) ............149, 308
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ...............81
Checks, Safety ............................81
Child Restraint ............................69
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ...........................74
Child Restraints .........................69
Infants And Child Restraints ................72
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt ..................................75
Older Children And Child Restraints ..........72
Using The Top Tether Anchorage .............77
Clean Air Gasoline ........................274
Cleaning
Wheels ...............................334
Windshield Wiper Blades ..................319
Climate Control ..........................193
Clutch Fluid .............................332
Compact Spare Tire ........................261
Contract, Service ..........................370
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ...........326
Cooling System...........................323
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............325
Coolant Capacity .......................354
Coolant Level ......................323, 327
Disposal Of Used Coolant .................327
Drain, Flush, And Refill ...................324
Inspection ............................327
Points To Remember .....................328
Pressure Cap ..........................326
Radiator Cap ..........................326
380 INDEX
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ......324, 354, 355
Corrosion Protection .......................333
Cruise Light .............................150
Cupholders .............................131
Customer Assistance .......................368
Data Recorder, Event .......................68
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights.............105
Daytime Running Lights ....................102
Dealer Service............................310
Defroster, Rear Window.....................135
Defroster, Windshield .......................83
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ..................106
Diagnostic System, Onboard .................308
Dimmer Switch, Headlight...................103
Dipsticks
Power Steering .........................232
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................327
Door Locks ..............................24
Key Fob Emergency Key ...................22
Door Locks, Automatic ......................27
Door Opener, Garage.......................118
Doors ..................................24
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water ................................229
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet)........127
Electric Remote Mirrors......................90
Electronic Brake Control System ...............236
Traction Control System ...................239
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ........112
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..............239
Emergency Brake .........................233
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ................303
Hazard Warning Flasher ..................286
10
INDEX 381
Jump Starting ..........................299
Overheating ...........................286
Towing ..............................304
Emission Control System Maintenance ..........308
Engine .................................307
Air Cleaner ...........................314
Break-In Recommendations .................80
Checking Oil Level ......................312
Compartment ..........................307
Coolant (Antifreeze) ..................323, 355
Cooling ..............................323
Exhaust Gas Caution ..................81, 278
Fails To Start ..........................220
Flooded, Starting .......................220
Fuel Requirements ...................274, 354
Oil ...........................312, 354, 355
Oil Change Interval ......................312
Oil Filler Cap ..........................313
Oil Selection .......................312, 354
Overheating ...........................286
Engine Oil Viscosity ....................313, 354
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ............65
Ethanol ................................275
Event Data Recorder ........................68
Exhaust Gas Caution ....................81, 278
Exhaust System ........................81, 320
Exterior Lighting ..........................99
Exterior Lights ............................84
Filler Location Fuel ........................147
Filters
Air Cleaner ...........................314
Engine Oil .........................313, 355
Engine Oil Disposal .....................313
Flashers
Hazard Warning ........................286
Turn Signal ......................84, 103, 142
Flash-To-Pass ............................103
382 INDEX
Flooded Engine Starting ....................220
Fluid Capacities ..........................354
Fluid Leaks ..............................84
Fluid Level Checks
Brake ............................329, 357
Capacities ............................354
Clutch Fluid ...........................332
Cooling System .........................323
Engine Oil ............................312
Manual Transmission .................331, 357
Power Steering ......................232, 357
Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts ...........355
Four-Way Hazard Flasher ...................286
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .....................303
Fuel...................................274
Additives .............................276
Clean Air .............................274
Ethanol ..............................275
Filler Door (Gas Cap) ....................147
Gasoline ..............................274
Gauge ...............................147
Materials Added ........................276
Methanol .............................275
Octane Rating ......................274, 355
Requirements .......................274, 354
Tank Capacity ..........................354
Fuses ..................................340
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) .........118,125
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................274
Gasoline (Fuel) ...........................274
Gasoline, Reformulated .....................274
Gauges
Fuel .................................147
Speedometer ..........................142
Tachometer ............................146
General Information .......................193
Glass
Cleaning ...........................337
10
INDEX 383
Ground Clearance .........................284
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water .........................229
Hazard Warning Flasher ....................286
Headlights
Automatic ............................100
Delay ................................101
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch .........103
Lights On Reminder .....................102
On With Wipers .....................100, 108
Passing ..............................103
Switch ................................99
Time Delay ............................101
Head Restraints ...........................96
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . .103
Holder, Cup .............................131
HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener).............118
Hood Release .............................97
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid .....................332
Illuminated Entry ..........................19
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ....................14
Inside Rearview Mirror ......................88
Instrument Cluster ........................142
Instrument Panel And Controls ...............140
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ...............337
Interior Appearance Care....................336
Interior Lights ...........................103
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers).............106
Introduction ..............................4
Jump Starting ............................299
KeyFob.................................11
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...........16
Programming Additional Transmitters .........16
384 INDEX
Remote Battery Replacement ................22
Key-In Reminder ..........................13
Keyless Entry System .....................11,20
Keyless Go...............................11
Key, Replacement ..........................15
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ....................14
Lane Change And Turn Signals ...............103
Lap/Shoulder Belts.........................35
Latches .................................84
Hood ................................97
Lead Free Gasoline ........................274
Leaks, Fluid ..............................84
Life Of Tires .............................264
Liftgate .................................30
Light Bulbs ..............................84
Lights................................84, 99
AirBag .........................66, 83, 142
Alarm ...............................146
Anti-Lock .........................153, 239
Automatic Headlights ....................100
Brake Warning .........................144
Bulb Replacement ....................351, 353
Cruise ...............................150
Daytime Running .......................102
Dimmer Switch, Headlight .............102, 103
Exterior ...............................84
Hazard Warning Flasher ..................286
Headlights .............................99
Headlights On Reminder ..................102
Headlights On With Wipers .............100, 108
Headlight Switch ........................99
High Beam ............................103
High Beam Indicator .....................147
High Beam/Low Beam Select ...............103
Illuminated Entry ........................19
Instrument Cluster .......................99
Intensity Control ........................104
10
INDEX 385
Interior ..............................103
Lights On Reminder .....................102
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) .........149
Oil Pressure ...........................146
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) ...........105
Passing ..............................103
Seat Belt Reminder ......................142
Security Alarm .........................146
Service ...........................351, 353
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .149
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) .........147, 268
Turn Signal ......................84, 102, 103
Vanity Mirror ...........................91
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) ......142
Loading Vehicle
Tires ................................250
Locks ..................................24
Automatic Door .........................27
Auto Unlock ...........................27
Door .................................24
Power Door ............................25
Low Tire Indicator ........................268
Low Tire Pressure System ...................268
Lubrication, Body .........................319
Lug Nuts ...............................287
Maintenance Free Battery....................315
Maintenance Procedures ....................311
Maintenance Schedule...................360, 362
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . .149, 309
Manual, Service ..........................373
Manual Transmission ...................221, 332
Fluid Level Check ...................331, 357
Lubricant Selection ......................357
Shift Speeds ...........................223
Methanol ...............................275
Mirrors .................................88
Electric Remote .........................90
386 INDEX
Outside ............................89, 90
Rearview ..............................88
Vanity ................................91
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ...............7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ................268
MOPAR® Parts .......................310, 372
MTBE/ETBE ............................275
Multi-Function Control Lever .................102
New Vehicle Break-In Period ..................80
Occupant Restraints ........................32
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ................274
Oil, Engine .......................312, 354, 355
Capacity .............................354
Change Interval ........................312
Checking .............................312
Dipstick ..............................312
Disposal ..............................313
Filter .............................313, 355
Filter Disposal .........................313
Materials Added To ......................313
Recommendation ....................312, 354
Viscosity ..........................313, 354
Oil Filter, Selection ........................313
Onboard Diagnostic System ..................308
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) ............118
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) .............4
Outside Rearview Mirrors ....................89
Overheating, Engine .......................286
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ..........4,373
Paint Care ..............................333
Panic Alarm ..............................21
Parking Brake............................233
Parking On Hill ..........................233
Passing Light ............................103
Pedals, Adjustable .........................110
10
INDEX 387
Pets....................................80
Placard, Tire And Loading Information ..........251
Power
Brakes ...............................235
Door Locks ............................25
Mirrors ...............................90
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ...........127
Steering ...........................231, 232
Windows ..............................27
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ...............41
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ..............................41
Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . .22
Radial Ply Tires ..........................258
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ...........326
Radio Antenna ...........................192
Radio Operation ..........................192
Radio (Sound Systems) .....................190
Rear Camera.............................116
Rear Liftgate .............................30
Rear Window Defroster .....................135
Rear Window Features .....................135
Reclining Front Seats .......................93
Recorder, Event Data .......................68
Recreational Towing .......................283
Reformulated Gasoline .....................274
Refrigerant ..............................318
Reminder, Lights On .......................102
Reminder, Seat Belt.........................34
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ..................20
FCC General Information ..................24
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...........16
Programming Additional Transmitters .........16
Remote Battery Replacement ................22
Transmitter Battery Replacement .............22
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls .........191
Replacement Keys .........................15
388 INDEX
Replacement Parts.........................310
Replacement Tires .........................265
Reporting Safety Defects ....................372
Restraint, Head ...........................96
Restraints, Child...........................69
Restraints, Occupant ........................32
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck .................303
Rotation, Tires ...........................267
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ..................82
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle .................83
Safety Defects, Reporting ....................372
Safety, Exhaust Gas.........................81
Safety Information, Tire .....................243
Safety Tips ...............................81
Schedule, Maintenance .....................360
Seat Belt
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ...........42
Energy Management Feature ................42
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ................38
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................35
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ...............40
Pregnant Women ........................41
Seat Belt Extender .......................40
Seat Belt Pretensioner .....................41
Seat Belt Reminder .......................34
Seat Belt Maintenance ......................338
Seat Belt Reminder .........................34
Seat Belts ...........................32, 34, 82
Child Restraint ..........................69
Extender ..............................40
Front Seat ........................34, 35, 38
Inspection .............................82
Operating Instructions ....................38
Pregnant Women ........................41
Pretensioners ...........................41
Rear Seat ..............................35
Untwisting Procedure .....................40
10
INDEX 389
Seats ...................................92
Adjustment ..........................92, 94
Reclining ..............................93
Security Alarm ............................17
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..............355
Selection Of Oil ..........................312
SENTRY KEY®
FCC General Information ..................16
Key Programming .......................16
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ....................14
Sentry Key Replacement .....................15
Service Assistance .........................368
Service Contract ..........................370
Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction Indicator) . .149
Service Manuals ..........................373
Shift Indicator Light .......................224
Shift Speeds ..........................221, 223
Shoulder Belts ............................35
Signals, Turn.......................84, 103, 142
Snow Chains (Tire Chains)...................266
Snow Tires ..............................259
Spare Tire ...........................261, 262
Spark Plugs .............................355
Speed Control (Cruise Control)................112
Speedometer.............................142
Sport Mode .............................153
Starting ................................218
Emergency (Jump Starting) ................299
Engine Fails To Start .....................220
Starting And Operating .....................218
Starting Procedures ........................218
Steering
Column Controls .......................102
Power ............................231, 232
Tilt Column ...........................109
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...............191
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .191
Storage ................................348
390 INDEX
Storage, Vehicle...........................199
Stuck, Freeing............................303
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag .........45
Tachometer..............................146
Tilt Steering Column .......................109
Time Delay, Headlight ......................101
Tire And Loading Information Placard .......250, 251
Tire Markings ............................243
Tires.............................83, 254, 374
Aging (Life Of Tires) .....................264
Air Pressure ...........................254
Chains ...............................266
Compact Spare .........................261
General Information .....................254
High Speed ...........................257
Inflation Pressures .......................256
Life Of Tires ...........................264
Load Capacity ......................250, 251
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ............268
Pressure Warning Light ...................147
Quality Grading ........................374
Radial ...............................258
Replacement ...........................265
Rotation ..............................267
Safety ............................243, 254
Sizes ................................245
Snow Tires ............................259
Spinning .............................263
Tread Wear Indicators ....................263
Tire Safety Information .....................243
Tire Service Kit ...........................289
Towing .............................282, 304
Disabled Vehicle ........................304
Recreational ...........................283
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome ...........283
T
raction ................................228
Traction Control ..........................239
10
INDEX 391
Trailer Towing ...........................282
Transmission ............................331
Fluid ................................357
Shifting ...........................221, 223
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .22
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .22
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) .........20
Transporting Pets ..........................80
Tread Wear Indicators ......................263
Turn Signals..........................103, 142
Uconnect®
Operation .............................190
Uconnect® Settings.........................27
Uconnect® Voice Command..................201
Uniform Tire Quality Grades .................374
Universal Transmitter ......................118
Unleaded Gasoline ........................274
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................40
Upholstery Care ..........................337
Vanity Mirrors ............................91
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............6
Vehicle Loading ..........................251
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...............7
Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) ..........17
Vehicle Storage........................199, 348
Vinyl Trim ..............................337
Viscosity, Engine Oil ....................313, 354
Voice Recognition System (VR)................201
Warning Flasher, Hazard ....................286
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .142
Warnings And Cautions ......................6
Warranty Information ......................371
Washer
Adding Fluid ..........................320
Washers, Windshield....................107, 320
392 INDEX
Washing Vehicle ..........................333
Water
Driving Through ........................229
Wheel And Wheel Trim .....................334
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care .................334
Window Fogging .........................199
Windows ................................27
Power ................................27
Reset Auto-Up ..........................30
Windshield Defroster .......................83
Windshield Washers.................106, 107, 320
Windshield Wiper Blades....................319
Windshield Wipers ........................106
Wiper Blade Replacement ...................319
Wipers, Intermittent .......................106
10
INDEX 393
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Viper SRT
OWNER’S MANUAL
2015
2015 Viper SRT
15ZD-126-AD Fourth Edition Printed in U.S.A.
FCA US LLC
